diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json b/docs/rds/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json index 724257bbb..263b43228 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json +++ b/docs/rds/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json @@ -296,11 +296,32 @@ "title":"DB Instance Classes", "githuburl":"" }, + { + "uri":"rds_01_0020.html", + "node_id":"rds_01_0020.xml", + "product_code":"rds", + "code":"15", + "des":"The database system is generally an important part of an IT system and has high requirements on storage I/O performance. You can select a storage type based on service de", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"DB Instance Storage Types,DB Instance Description,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "IsMulti":"No;Yes;no", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "prodname":"rds", + "opensource":"true", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"DB Instance Storage Types", + "githuburl":"" + }, { "uri":"rds_01_0021.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0021.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"15", + "code":"16", "des":"Table 1 lists the DB engines and versions supported by RDS.For new applications, you are advised to use the latest major version of the DB engine, for example, MySQL 8.0.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DB Engines and Versions,DB Instance Description,User Guide", @@ -321,7 +342,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"16", + "code":"17", "des":"The status of a DB instance indicates the health of the DB instance. You can use the management console or API to view the status of a DB instance.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DB Instance Statuses,DB Instance Description,User Guide", @@ -342,7 +363,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"17", + "code":"18", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Typical Applications", @@ -363,7 +384,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0012.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0012.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"18", + "code":"19", "des":"RDS for MySQL, RDS for PostgreSQL, RDS for SQL Server 2022 Enterprise Edition, 2019 Enterprise Edition, and 2017 Enterprise Edition DB instances support read replicas to ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read/Write Splitting,Typical Applications,User Guide", @@ -384,7 +405,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0013.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0013.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"19", + "code":"20", "des":"RDS supports diverse storage extension through Distributed Cache Service (DCS) for Memcached, DCS for Redis, and OBS.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Diversified Data Storage,Typical Applications,User Guide", @@ -405,7 +426,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"20", + "code":"21", "des":"If you need to assign different permissions to employees in your enterprise to access your RDS resources, Identity and Access Management (IAM) is a good choice for fine-g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management,Introduction,User Guide", @@ -426,7 +447,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"21", + "code":"22", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Constraints", @@ -447,7 +468,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"22", + "code":"23", "des":"Table 1 shows the constraints designed to ensure the stability and security of RDS for MySQL.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"MySQL Constraints,Constraints,User Guide", @@ -468,7 +489,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0012.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0012.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"23", + "code":"24", "des":"Table 1 shows the constraints designed to ensure the stability and security of RDS for PostgreSQL.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"PostgreSQL Constraints,Constraints,User Guide", @@ -489,7 +510,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"24", + "code":"25", "des":"RDS for SQL Server only supports DB instances under the License Included model and does not support \"bring your own license\" (BYOL). After a DB instance is created, it co", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SQL Server,Microsoft SQL Server Constraints,Constraints,User Guide", @@ -510,7 +531,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0031.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0031.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"25", + "code":"26", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DB Engine", @@ -531,7 +552,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"26", + "code":"27", "des":"This section describes function differences between single and primary/standby DB instances as well as function differences among Microsoft SQL Server editions.For detail", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"differences of basic functions,DB instance types,differences of database migration functions,differe", @@ -552,7 +573,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0027.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0027.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"27", + "code":"28", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Related Services,Introduction,User Guide", @@ -573,7 +594,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0088.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0088.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"28", + "code":"29", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Product Release Notes", @@ -594,7 +615,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0087.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0087.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"29", + "code":"30", "des":"RDS for MySQL extends the lifecycle of MySQL Community Edition. New versions are released during the extended period only to fix issues that severely affect the security ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS for MySQL Versioning Policy,Product Release Notes,User Guide", @@ -615,7 +636,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0089.html", "node_id":"rds_01_0089.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"30", + "code":"31", "des":"The PostgreSQL community releases a new major version containing new features about once a year. Each major version receives bug fixes and, if need be, security fixes tha", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS for PostgreSQL Versioning Policy,Product Release Notes,User Guide", @@ -636,7 +657,7 @@ "uri":"index.html", "node_id":"index.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"31", + "code":"32", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Getting Started with RDS for MySQL", @@ -657,7 +678,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0119.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0119.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"32", + "code":"33", "des":"You can create and connect to DB instances on the RDS console.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Operation Guide,Getting Started with RDS for MySQL,User Guide", @@ -678,7 +699,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0008.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0008.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"33", + "code":"34", "des":"This section describes how to create a DB instance on the management console.The DB instance class and storage space you need depend on your processing power and memory r", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DB Engine,Step 1: Create a DB Instance,Getting Started with RDS for MySQL,User Guide", @@ -699,7 +720,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"34", + "code":"35", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance", @@ -720,7 +741,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0060.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0060.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"35", + "code":"36", "des":"An RDS DB instance can be connected through a private network or a public network.VPC: indicates the Virtual Private Cloud.ECS: indicates the Elastic Cloud Server.If the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,Connecting to a DB Instance,Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance,User Guide", @@ -741,7 +762,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0101.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0101.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"36", + "code":"37", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Private Network", @@ -762,7 +783,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_apply_for_rds.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_apply_for_rds.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"37", + "code":"38", "des":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a MySQL DB instance through a private network.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview,Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Private Network,User Guide", @@ -783,7 +804,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"38", + "code":"39", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,Configuring Security Group Rules,Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a", @@ -804,7 +825,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0047.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0047.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"39", + "code":"40", "des":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.You have logged in to an ECS.To co", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,encrypts data,Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Private Network,Connecting to an ", @@ -825,7 +846,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0048.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0048.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"40", + "code":"41", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Public Network", @@ -846,7 +867,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0099.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0099.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"41", + "code":"42", "des":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a MySQL DB instance through a public network.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview,Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Public Network,User Guide", @@ -867,7 +888,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"42", + "code":"43", "des":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility and can un", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"configure security groups,Binding an EIP,Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Public", @@ -888,7 +909,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0009.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0009.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"43", + "code":"44", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,Configuring Security Group Rules,Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a", @@ -909,7 +930,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_connect_instance.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_connect_instance.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"44", + "code":"45", "des":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.An EIP has been bound to the targe", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,encrypts data,Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Public Network,Connecting to an R", @@ -930,7 +951,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0063.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0063.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"45", + "code":"46", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Getting Started with RDS for PostgreSQL", @@ -951,7 +972,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"46", + "code":"47", "des":"You can create and connect to DB instances on the RDS console.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Operation Guide,Getting Started with RDS for PostgreSQL,User Guide", @@ -972,7 +993,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0065.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0065.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"47", + "code":"48", "des":"You can create DB instances using the RDS console or APIs. For details about how to create DB instances using APIs, see \"Creating a DB Instance\" in the Relational Databas", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create DB instances,create a DB instance,Step 1: Create a DB Instance,Getting Started with RDS for P", @@ -993,7 +1014,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"48", + "code":"49", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance", @@ -1014,7 +1035,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0060.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0060.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"49", + "code":"50", "des":"An RDS DB instance can be connected through a private network or a public network.VPC: indicates the Virtual Private Cloud.ECS: indicates the Elastic Cloud Server.If the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to a DB Instance,Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance,User Guide", @@ -1035,7 +1056,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0013.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0013.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"50", + "code":"51", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Private Network", @@ -1056,7 +1077,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0010.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0010.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"51", + "code":"52", "des":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a PostgreSQL DB instance through a private network.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Private Network,User Guide", @@ -1077,7 +1098,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0014.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0014.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"52", + "code":"53", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,Configuring Security Group Rules,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Pri", @@ -1098,7 +1119,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0016.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0016.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"53", + "code":"54", "des":"You can use the PostgreSQL client psql to connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection is encrypted and therefore more s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,SSL Connection,Connecting to a DB Instance Through psql,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB", @@ -1119,7 +1140,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"54", + "code":"55", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Public Network", @@ -1140,7 +1161,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0019.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0019.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"55", + "code":"56", "des":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a PostgreSQL DB instance through a public network.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Public Network,User Guide", @@ -1161,7 +1182,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0064.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0064.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"56", + "code":"57", "des":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility and can un", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"configure security groups,Binding an EIP,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Public Net", @@ -1182,7 +1203,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"57", + "code":"58", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,Configuring Security Group Rules,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Pub", @@ -1203,7 +1224,7 @@ "uri":"rds_02_0051.html", "node_id":"rds_02_0051.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"58", + "code":"59", "des":"You can use the PostgreSQL client psql to connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection is encrypted and therefore more s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,SSL Connection,Connecting to a DB Instance Through psql,Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB", @@ -1224,7 +1245,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0014.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0014.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"59", + "code":"60", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Getting Started with RDS for SQL Server", @@ -1245,7 +1266,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0010.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0010.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"60", + "code":"61", "des":"You can create and connect to DB instances on the RDS console.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Operation Guide,Getting Started with RDS for SQL Server,User Guide", @@ -1266,7 +1287,7 @@ "uri":"rds_04_0061.html", "node_id":"rds_04_0061.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"61", + "code":"62", "des":"You can create DB instances using the RDS console or APIs. For details about how to create DB instances using APIs, see the \"Creating a DB Instance\" section in the Relati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create a DB instance,Step 1: Create a DB Instance,Getting Started with RDS for SQL Server,User Guide", @@ -1287,7 +1308,7 @@ "uri":"rds_04_0062.html", "node_id":"rds_04_0062.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"62", + "code":"63", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance", @@ -1308,7 +1329,7 @@ "uri":"rds_04_0060.html", "node_id":"rds_04_0060.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"63", + "code":"64", "des":"An RDS DB instance can be connected through a private network or a public network.VPC: indicates the Virtual Private Cloud.ECS: indicates the Elastic Cloud Server.If the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to a DB Instance,Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance,User Guide", @@ -1329,7 +1350,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0008.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0008.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"64", + "code":"65", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Private Network", @@ -1350,7 +1371,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"65", + "code":"66", "des":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server DB instance through a private network.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview,Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Private Network,User Guide", @@ -1371,7 +1392,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"66", + "code":"67", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,Configuring Security Group Rules,Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Pri", @@ -1392,7 +1413,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0013.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0013.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"67", + "code":"68", "des":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.Prepare an ECS.To connect to a DB ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,encrypts data,Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Private Network,Connecting to a S", @@ -1413,7 +1434,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0052.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0052.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"68", + "code":"69", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Public Network", @@ -1434,7 +1455,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0066.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0066.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"69", + "code":"70", "des":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server DB instance through a public network.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Overview,Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Public Network,User Guide", @@ -1455,7 +1476,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"70", + "code":"71", "des":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility and can un", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"configure security groups,Binding an EIP,Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Public Net", @@ -1476,7 +1497,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0051.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0051.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"71", + "code":"72", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,Configuring Security Group Rules,Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Pub", @@ -1497,7 +1518,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0007.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0007.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"72", + "code":"73", "des":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.Install the Microsoft SQL Server c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,encrypts data,Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Public Network,Connecting to a SQ", @@ -1518,7 +1539,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"73", + "code":"74", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Working with RDS for MySQL", @@ -1536,7 +1557,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0001_02.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0001_02.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"74", + "code":"75", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Migration", @@ -1554,7 +1575,7 @@ "uri":"rds_migration_mysql.html", "node_id":"rds_migration_mysql.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"75", + "code":"76", "des":"You can access RDS DB instances through an EIP or through an ECS.Prepare an ECS for accessing DB instances in the same VPC or prepare a device for accessing RDS through a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migrating Data to RDS for MySQL Using mysqldump,Data Migration,User Guide", @@ -1572,7 +1593,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_00000.html", "node_id":"rds_08_00000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"76", + "code":"77", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameter Tuning", @@ -1590,7 +1611,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_00001.html", "node_id":"rds_08_00001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"77", + "code":"78", "des":"Parameters are key configuration items in a database system. Improper parameter settings may adversely affect the stable running of databases. This section describes some", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Suggestions on MySQL Parameter Tuning,Parameter Tuning,User Guide", @@ -1608,7 +1629,7 @@ "uri":"rds_07_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_07_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"78", + "code":"79", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management", @@ -1626,7 +1647,7 @@ "uri":"rds_07_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_07_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"79", + "code":"80", "des":"This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,RDS,RDS,Creating a User and Granting Permissions,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -1644,7 +1665,7 @@ "uri":"rds_07_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_07_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"80", + "code":"81", "des":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system policies of RDS.You can create custom policies in either of the following two ways:Visual editor: Select cloud ser", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,RDS Custom Policies,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -1662,7 +1683,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"81", + "code":"82", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instance Lifecycle", @@ -1680,7 +1701,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0055.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0055.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"82", + "code":"83", "des":"This section describes how to quickly create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one.You can create DB instances with the same configurations numer", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one,Creating a Same DB Instance as", @@ -1698,7 +1719,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0057.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0057.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"83", + "code":"84", "des":"If you use DB instances only for routine development, you can temporarily stop instances to save money. You can stop a DB instance for up to seven days.If you stop a prim", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Stopping a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -1716,7 +1737,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0058.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0058.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"84", + "code":"85", "des":"You can stop your DB instance temporarily to save money. After stopping your DB instance, you can restart it to begin using it again.If you start a primary DB instance, r", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Starting a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -1734,7 +1755,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0013.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0013.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"85", + "code":"86", "des":"You may need to reboot a DB instance during maintenance. For example, after modifying some parameters, a reboot is required for the modifications to take effect. You can ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Rebooting DB Instances or Read Replicas,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -1752,7 +1773,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0022.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0022.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"86", + "code":"87", "des":"You can customize which instance items are displayed on the Instances page.The following items are displayed by default: DB instance name/ID, DB instance type, DB engine ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"instance items,edit columns,Selecting Displayed Items,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -1770,7 +1791,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"87", + "code":"88", "des":"You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Exporting DB Instance Information,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -1788,7 +1809,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"88", + "code":"89", "des":"To release resources, you can delete DB instances or read replicas as required on the Instances page.DB instances cannot be deleted when operations are being performed on", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a DB Instance,Deleting a Read Replica,Deleting a DB Instance or Read Replica,Instance Lifec", @@ -1806,7 +1827,7 @@ "uri":"rds_mysql_recycle.html", "node_id":"rds_mysql_recycle.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"89", + "code":"90", "des":"Deleted DB instances can be moved to the recycle bin. You can rebuild DB instances from the recycle bin. The DB engine, DB engine version, and storage type of the new DB ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read replicas,Recycling a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -1824,7 +1845,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"90", + "code":"91", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instance Modifications", @@ -1842,7 +1863,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"91", + "code":"92", "des":"On the Overview page, you can get knowledge of the overall status of your RDS for MySQL instance, including alarms, intelligent anomaly diagnosis, and key performance met", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Introduction to Instance Overview,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1860,7 +1881,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"92", + "code":"93", "des":"RDS for MySQL supports minor version upgrades to improve performance, add new functions, and fix bugs.The upgrade will cause the DB instance to reboot and interrupt servi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS for MySQL,MySQL,Upgrading a Minor Version,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1878,7 +1899,7 @@ "uri":"rds_modify_instance_name.html", "node_id":"rds_modify_instance_name.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"93", + "code":"94", "des":"You can change the name of a primary DB instance or read replica.Alternatively, click the target DB instance to go to the Overview page. Under DB Instance Name, click to", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"name,Changing a DB Instance Name,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1896,7 +1917,7 @@ "uri":"rds_modify_availability.html", "node_id":"rds_modify_availability.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"94", + "code":"95", "des":"You can configure the failover priority for reliability or for availability, depending on your service requirements.Reliability: This option is selected by default. Data ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"failover priority,Changing the Failover Priority,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1914,7 +1935,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_scale_rds.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_scale_rds.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"95", + "code":"96", "des":"You can change the instance class (CPU or memory) of a DB instance as required. If the status of a DB instance changes from Changing instance class to Available, the chan", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"CPU or memory,Changing a DB Instance Class,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1932,7 +1953,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_scale_cluster.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_scale_cluster.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"96", + "code":"97", "des":"If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.You are advised to set alarm rules for the storage space u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"scale up storage space,scale up storage space,MySQL,Scaling up Storage Space,Instance Modifications,", @@ -1950,7 +1971,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0039.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0039.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"97", + "code":"98", "des":"With storage autoscaling enabled, when RDS detects that you are running out of database space, it automatically scales up your storage.Autoscaling up the storage of a rea", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Storage Autoscaling,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1968,7 +1989,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0140.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0140.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"98", + "code":"99", "des":"If the storage type of your RDS DB instance does not match your workloads, you can change it as needed.Alternatively, click the instance name to go to the Overview page. ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Storage Type,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -1986,7 +2007,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0038.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0038.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"99", + "code":"100", "des":"The maintenance window is 02:00–06:00 by default and you can change it as required. To prevent service interruptions, you are advised to set the maintenance window to off", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing the Maintenance Window,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -2004,7 +2025,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"100", + "code":"101", "des":"RDS enables you to change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances to improve instance reliability. This operation does not affect the services running on the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances,Changing a DB Instance Type from Single t", @@ -2022,7 +2043,7 @@ "uri":"rds_switch_ha.html", "node_id":"rds_switch_ha.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"101", + "code":"102", "des":"If you choose to create primary/standby DB instances, RDS will create a primary DB instance and a synchronous standby DB instance in the same region. You can access the p", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Manually Switching Between Primary and Standby DB Instances,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -2040,7 +2061,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0060.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0060.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"102", + "code":"103", "des":"You can migrate a standby DB instance to another AZ in the same region as the original AZ.Primary/standby instances running MySQL 5.7, or 8.0 support standby instance mig", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migrating a Standby DB Instance,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -2058,7 +2079,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0011.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0011.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"103", + "code":"104", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read Replicas", @@ -2076,7 +2097,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0012.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0012.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"104", + "code":"105", "des":"RDS for MySQL supports read replicas.In read-intensive scenarios, a single DB instance may be unable to handle the read pressure and service performance may be affected. ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"read replicas,MySQL,Introducing Read Replicas,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -2094,7 +2115,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_add_read_replica.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_add_read_replica.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"105", + "code":"106", "des":"Read replicas are used to enhance the read capabilities and reduce the load on primary DB instances.After DB instances are created, you can create read replicas for them.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create read replicas,Creating a Read Replica,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -2112,7 +2133,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0015.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0015.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"106", + "code":"107", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing a Read Replica,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -2130,7 +2151,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0034.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0034.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"107", + "code":"108", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backups and Restorations", @@ -2148,7 +2169,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"108", + "code":"109", "des":"RDS for MySQL automatically creates backups for DB instances during the backup time window. The backups are stored based on a preset retention period (1 to 732 days).A ba", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Introduction to Backups,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2166,7 +2187,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_backup_restore.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_backup_restore.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"109", + "code":"110", "des":"RDS for MySQL supports multiple backup types. Based on different dimensions, there are the following backup types:", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup Types,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2184,7 +2205,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"110", + "code":"111", "des":"When you create a DB instance, an automated backup policy is enabled by default. For security purposes, the automated backup policy cannot be disabled. After the DB insta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring an Intra-Region Backup Policy,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2202,7 +2223,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"111", + "code":"112", "des":"RDS allows you to create manual backups of a running primary DB instance. You can use these backups to restore data.When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create manual backups,Creating a Manual Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2220,7 +2241,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"112", + "code":"113", "des":"This section describes how to download a manual or an automated backup file to a local device and restore data from the backup file.RDS for MySQL enables you to download ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"download a manual or an automated backup file,RDS for MySQL,full backup files,Downloading a Backup F", @@ -2238,7 +2259,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0100.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0100.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"113", + "code":"114", "des":"RDS for MySQL allows you to download binlog backup files to your client computer and use them to restore DB instances if necessary.You can also select the binlog backups ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"binlog backup files,Downloading a Binlog Backup File,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2256,7 +2277,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0007.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0007.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"114", + "code":"115", "des":"This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created. The restoration is at the DB instance ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Restoring from Backup Files to DB Instances,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2274,7 +2295,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0044.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0044.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"115", + "code":"116", "des":"You can download backup files by referring to Downloading a Backup File and restore data from them.Backup data cannot be restored to local databases that run the Windows ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Restoring from Backup Files to a Self-Built MySQL Database,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2292,7 +2313,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0008.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0008.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"116", + "code":"117", "des":"You can restore from automated backups to a specified point in time.RDS for MySQL supports restoration to a new, the original, or an existing DB instance.When you enter t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS for MySQL,restoration to a new, the original,,Restoring a DB Instance to a Point in Time,Backups", @@ -2310,7 +2331,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0009.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0009.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"117", + "code":"118", "des":"This section describes how to replicate a manual or an automated backup. The new backup name must be different from the original backup name.You can replicate backups and", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"replicate a manual or an automated backup,Replicating a Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2328,7 +2349,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0010.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0010.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"118", + "code":"119", "des":"You can delete manual backups to free up backup storage.Deleted manual backups cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.The following backups ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Manual Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -2346,7 +2367,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0011.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0011.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"119", + "code":"120", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameter Template Management", @@ -2364,7 +2385,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_parameter_group.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_parameter_group.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"120", + "code":"121", "des":"You can use database parameter templates to manage the DB engine configuration. A database parameter template acts as a container for engine configuration values that can", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2382,7 +2403,7 @@ "uri":"rds_configuration.html", "node_id":"rds_configuration.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"121", + "code":"122", "des":"You can modify parameters in a custom parameter template to optimize RDS database performance.You can only change parameter values in custom parameter templates. You cann", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying Parameters,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2400,7 +2421,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0043.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0043.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"122", + "code":"123", "des":"RDS allows you to import new parameter templates for future use. To apply an imported parameter template to new DB instances, see Applying a Parameter Template.Only param", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Importing a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2418,7 +2439,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0042.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0042.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"123", + "code":"124", "des":"You can export a parameter template of a DB instance for future use. You can also apply the exported parameter template to DB instances by referring to Applying a Paramet", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Exporting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2436,7 +2457,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0012.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0012.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"124", + "code":"125", "des":"You can compare DB instance parameters with a parameter template that uses the same DB engine to understand the differences of parameter settings.You can also compare def", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Compare,Comparing Parameter Templates,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2454,7 +2475,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0099.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0099.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"125", + "code":"126", "des":"You can view the change history of DB instance parameters or custom parameter templates.An exported or custom parameter template has initially a blank change history.You ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Parameter Change History,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2472,7 +2493,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0014.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0014.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"126", + "code":"127", "des":"You can replicate a parameter template you have created. When you have already created a parameter template and want to include most of the custom parameters and values f", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Replicating a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2490,7 +2511,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0015.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0015.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"127", + "code":"128", "des":"You can reset all parameters in a custom parameter template to their default settings.If the DB instance status is Parameter change. Pending reboot, a reboot is required ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resetting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2508,7 +2529,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"128", + "code":"129", "des":"You can apply parameter templates to DB instances as needed.The parameter innodb_buffer_pool_size is determined by the memory. DB instances of different specifications ha", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Applying a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2526,7 +2547,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0098.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0098.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"129", + "code":"130", "des":"You can view the application records of a parameter template.You can view the name or ID of the DB instance that the parameter template applies to, as well as the applica", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Application Records of a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2544,7 +2565,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0016.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0016.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"130", + "code":"131", "des":"You can modify the description of a parameter template you have created.You cannot modify the description of a default parameter template.The description consists of a ma", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying a Parameter Template Description,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2562,7 +2583,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"131", + "code":"132", "des":"You can delete a custom parameter template that is no longer in use.Deleted parameter templates cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.Defau", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -2580,7 +2601,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"132", + "code":"133", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connection Management", @@ -2598,7 +2619,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"133", + "code":"134", "des":"You can change floating IP addresses after migrating on-premises databases or other cloud databases to RDS.After a floating IP address is changed, the domain name needs t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change floating IP addresses,automatically-assigned IP address,change the floating IP address,Config", @@ -2616,7 +2637,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0085.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0085.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"134", + "code":"135", "des":"You can connect to RDS DB instances through private domain names.Changing the private domain name will interrupt your database connection. To reconnect to the instance, c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Private Domain Name,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -2634,7 +2655,7 @@ "uri":"rds_public_accessibility.html", "node_id":"rds_public_accessibility.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"135", + "code":"136", "des":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility, and you c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Binding and Unbinding an EIP,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -2652,7 +2673,7 @@ "uri":"rds_change_database_port.html", "node_id":"rds_change_database_port.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"136", + "code":"137", "des":"This section describes how to change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the database port of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica,Changing a Database Port,Connect", @@ -2670,7 +2691,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0009.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0009.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"137", + "code":"138", "des":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"security group,RDS,RDS,RDS,RDS,RDS,Configuring a Security Group Rule,Connection Management,User Guid", @@ -2688,7 +2709,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0050.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0050.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"138", + "code":"139", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting)", @@ -2706,7 +2727,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0035.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0035.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"139", + "code":"140", "des":"Read/write splitting enables read and write requests to be automatically routed through a read/write splitting address. You can enable read/write splitting after read rep", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Introducing Read/Write Splitting,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2724,7 +2745,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0027.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0027.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"140", + "code":"141", "des":"The following table describes the updates in each kernel version of RDS for MySQL database proxy.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Kernel Versions,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2742,7 +2763,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0047.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0047.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"141", + "code":"142", "des":"In most cases, an RDS for MySQL proxy instance sends all requests in transactions to the primary DB instance to ensure transaction correctness. However, in some framework", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring Transaction Splitting,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2760,8 +2781,8 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"142", - "des":"Read/write splitting enables read and write requests to be automatically routed through a read/write splitting address. This section describes how to enable read/write sp", + "code":"143", + "des":"You can enable database proxy for your RDS for MySQL instance to automatically forward read and write requests through a proxy address. To reduce read pressure of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Enabling Read/Write Splitting,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", "search_title":"", @@ -2778,8 +2799,8 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"143", - "des":"After read/write splitting is enabled, you can configure the delay threshold and routing policy as required.The system automatically distributes weights to read replicas,", + "code":"144", + "des":"After database proxy is enabled and read replicas are created, you can configure the delay threshold and routing policy as required.The system automatically distributes w", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring the Delay Threshold and Routing Policy,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", "search_title":"", @@ -2796,7 +2817,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"144", + "code":"145", "des":"After read/write splitting is enabled, you can change the read/write splitting address.Changing the read/write splitting address will interrupt database connections and s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change the read/write splitting address,Changing the Read/Write Splitting Address,Database Proxy (Re", @@ -2814,7 +2835,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0066.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0066.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"145", + "code":"146", "des":"After a database proxy is created, you can apply for a private domain name for it and change the domain name later as needed.The private domain name must be unique in a g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Applying for and Changing a Private Domain Name for a Database Proxy,Database Proxy (Read/Write Spli", @@ -2832,7 +2853,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0028.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0028.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"146", + "code":"147", "des":"You can change the instance class (vCPU or memory) of a DB proxy instance as required. If the DB instance status changes from Changing proxy instance class to Available, ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"vCPU or memory,Changing the Instance Class of a DB Proxy Instance,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitti", @@ -2850,7 +2871,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0045.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0045.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"147", + "code":"148", "des":"After read/write splitting is enabled, you can change the number of proxy nodes as required.Read/write splitting has been enabled.The primary DB instance, read replicas, ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing the Number of Proxy Nodes,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2868,7 +2889,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"148", + "code":"149", "des":"You can manually upgrade the RDS for MySQL database proxy to the latest kernel version to improve performance, add new functions, and fix problems.For details about kerne", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Upgrading the Kernel Version of Database Proxy,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2886,7 +2907,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"149", + "code":"150", "des":"If load balancing is enabled for a database proxy instance, the security group associated with the proxy instance does not apply. You need to use access control to grant ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Enabling or Disabling Access Control,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2904,7 +2925,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0019.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0019.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"150", + "code":"151", "des":"You can disable read/write splitting as required.If the database proxy is disabled, read/write splitting is also disabled and services using the read/write splitting addr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Disabling Read/Write Splitting,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2922,7 +2943,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0020.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0020.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"151", + "code":"152", "des":"This section describes the rules of distributing read weights to DB instances of different specifications.When the system automatically sets the read weights for DB insta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Rules for Distributing Weights,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2940,7 +2961,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0021.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0021.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"152", + "code":"153", "des":"After read/write splitting is enabled, databases can be connected through a read/write splitting address. You can use internal SQL commands to verify the read/write split", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Testing Read/Write Splitting Performance,Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting),User Guide", @@ -2958,7 +2979,7 @@ "uri":"rds_22_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_22_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"153", + "code":"154", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Problem Diagnosis and SQL Analysis", @@ -2976,7 +2997,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0037.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0037.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"154", + "code":"155", "des":"DBA Assistant provides visualized database O&M and intelligent diagnosis for developers and database administrators (DBAs), making database O&M easy and efficient. By ana", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Function Overview,Problem Diagnosis and SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -2994,7 +3015,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"155", + "code":"156", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Performance Monitoring", @@ -3012,7 +3033,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0027.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0027.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"156", + "code":"157", "des":"DBA Assistant allows you to view the performance metrics of your DB instance. Historical trends of performance metrics within a specified time period help you learn about", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Performance Metrics of a DB Instance,Performance Monitoring,User Guide", @@ -3030,7 +3051,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"157", + "code":"158", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Problem Diagnosis", @@ -3048,7 +3069,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"158", + "code":"159", "des":"You can view current session statistics of your instance, identify abnormal sessions, and kill the sessions.Viewing session statisticsIn the sessions statistics, you can ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Real-Time Sessions,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -3066,7 +3087,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0028.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0028.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"159", + "code":"160", "des":"Data and log storage space and its changes significantly impact database performance. RDS for MySQL shows you the distribution and changes of used storage on the Storage ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Storage Capacity,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -3084,7 +3105,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0029.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0029.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"160", + "code":"161", "des":"DBA Assistant allows you to check whether your DB instance has metadata locks and InnoDB locks. You can also check the recent deadlock analysis and full deadlock analysis", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Locks & Transactions,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -3102,7 +3123,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0039.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0039.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"161", + "code":"162", "des":"This function is used to analyze and discover large transactions and the transactions that have been there for a long time without being committed in the database.Data on", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Historical Transactions,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -3120,7 +3141,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0035.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0035.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"162", + "code":"163", "des":"You can start a diagnosis for your DB instance and subscribe to diagnosis reports.Starting a Diagnosis: You can perform an overall health diagnosis on your instance and v", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Daily Reports,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -3138,7 +3159,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"163", + "code":"164", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SQL Analysis", @@ -3156,7 +3177,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0030.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0030.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"164", + "code":"165", "des":"Slow Query Log displays a chart of SQL statements that are taking too long to execute and allows you to sort slow SQL statements by multiple dimensions, such as by user, ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Slow Query Logs of a DB Instance,SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -3174,8 +3195,8 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0031.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0031.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"165", - "des":"Top SQL shows the SQL queries that have been contribued at most to database load. You can sort them by multiple dimensions.Top SQL needs to be purchased separately. To us", + "code":"166", + "des":"Top SQL shows the SQL queries that have been contributed at most to database load. You can sort them by multiple dimensions.Top SQL needs to be purchased separately. To u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Top SQL Statements of a DB Instance,SQL Analysis,User Guide", "search_title":"", @@ -3192,7 +3213,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0032.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0032.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"166", + "code":"167", "des":"SQL Insights allows you to not only query all executed SQL statements, but also analyze and search for the tables that are accessed and updated most frequently, and the S", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a SQL Insights Task,SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -3210,7 +3231,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0033.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0033.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"167", + "code":"168", "des":"You can create rules to control concurrent execution of SQL statements by specifying SQL type, keywords, and maximum concurrency. To maintain better performance at high c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a SQL Throttling Rule,SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -3228,7 +3249,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"168", + "code":"169", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Security", @@ -3246,7 +3267,7 @@ "uri":"rds_reset_password.html", "node_id":"rds_reset_password.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"169", + "code":"170", "des":"You can reset the administrator password of a primary instance.You can also reset the password of your database account when using RDS.If you have changed the administrat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"reset the administrator password,RDS,Resetting the Administrator Password,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -3264,7 +3285,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"170", + "code":"171", "des":"This section describes how to change the security group of a primary DB instance or read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the security group of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Security Group,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -3278,11 +3299,29 @@ "title":"Changing a Security Group", "githuburl":"" }, + { + "uri":"rds_mysql_0001.html", + "node_id":"rds_mysql_0001.xml", + "product_code":"rds", + "code":"172", + "des":"Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an encryption-based Internet security protocol for establishing an encrypted link between a server and a client. It provides authenticated In", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Configuring an SSL Connection,Data Security,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"rds", + "documenttype":"usermanual" + } + ], + "title":"Configuring an SSL Connection", + "githuburl":"" + }, { "uri":"rds_08_0019.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0019.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"171", + "code":"173", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Metrics and Alarms", @@ -3300,7 +3339,7 @@ "uri":"rds_06_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_06_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"172", + "code":"174", "des":"The RDS Agent monitors RDS DB instances and collects monitoring metrics only.This section describes the RDS metrics that can be monitored by Cloud Eye as well as their na", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring Displayed Metrics,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -3318,7 +3357,7 @@ "uri":"rds_06_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_06_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"173", + "code":"175", "des":"You can set alarm rules by referring to Setting Alarm Rules to customize the monitored objects and notification policies and keep track of the RDS running status.The RDS ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Setting Alarm Rules,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -3336,7 +3375,7 @@ "uri":"rds_06_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_06_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"174", + "code":"176", "des":"Cloud Eye monitors the statuses of RDS DB instances. You can view RDS monitoring metrics on the management console.Monitored data takes some time before it can be display", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Monitoring Metrics,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -3354,7 +3393,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0020.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0020.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"175", + "code":"177", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Interconnection with CTS", @@ -3372,7 +3411,7 @@ "uri":"rds_06_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_06_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"176", + "code":"178", "des":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations related to RDS for further query, audit, and backtrack.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS),Key Operations Supported by CTS,Interconnection with CTS,User Guide", @@ -3390,7 +3429,7 @@ "uri":"rds_06_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_06_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"177", + "code":"179", "des":"After CTS is enabled, operations on cloud resources are recorded. You can view the operation records of the last 7 days on the CTS console.This section describes how to q", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Tracing Events,Interconnection with CTS,User Guide", @@ -3408,7 +3447,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0021.html", "node_id":"rds_08_0021.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"178", + "code":"180", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Log Management", @@ -3426,7 +3465,7 @@ "uri":"rds_mysql_error_log.html", "node_id":"rds_mysql_error_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"179", + "code":"181", "des":"RDS log management allows you to view database-level logs, including error logs and slow SQL query logs.Error logs contain warning- and error-level logs generated during ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Error Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -3444,7 +3483,7 @@ "uri":"rds_mysql_slow_query_log.html", "node_id":"rds_mysql_slow_query_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"180", + "code":"182", "des":"Slow query logs record statements that exceed long_query_time. You can use these logs to identify and optimize the statements that are executing slowly.RDS supports the f", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Slow Query Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -3462,7 +3501,7 @@ "uri":"rds_switch_log.html", "node_id":"rds_switch_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"181", + "code":"183", "des":"You can view failover or switchover logs of MySQL DB instances to evaluate the impact on services.Only failover and switchover logs within 30 days are displayed.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"MySQL,Viewing Failover/Switchover Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -3480,7 +3519,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sql_auditing_log.html", "node_id":"rds_sql_auditing_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"182", + "code":"184", "des":"After you enable the SQL audit function, all SQL operations will be recorded in log files. You can download audit logs to view log details.By default, SQL audit is disabl", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Enabling the SQL Audit Function,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -3498,7 +3537,7 @@ "uri":"rds_download_sql_auditing_log.html", "node_id":"rds_download_sql_auditing_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"183", + "code":"185", "des":"If you enable the SQL audit function, all SQL operations will be logged, and you can download audit logs to view details. By default, the SQL audit function is disabled. ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Downloading SQL Audit Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -3516,7 +3555,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0007.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0007.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"184", + "code":"186", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Center", @@ -3534,7 +3573,7 @@ "uri":"rds_task_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_task_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"185", + "code":"187", "des":"You can view the progress and results of scheduled and instant tasks on the Task Center page.RDS allows you to view and manage the following instant tasks:Creating DB ins", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing a Task,Task Center,User Guide", @@ -3552,7 +3591,7 @@ "uri":"rds_task_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_task_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"186", + "code":"188", "des":"You can delete task records so that they are no longer displayed in the task list. This operation only deletes the task records, and does not delete the DB instances or t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Task Record,Task Center,User Guide", @@ -3570,7 +3609,7 @@ "uri":"rds_tag.html", "node_id":"rds_tag.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"187", + "code":"189", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Managing Tags,Working with RDS for MySQL,User Guide", @@ -3588,7 +3627,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"188", + "code":"190", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Working with RDS for PostgreSQL", @@ -3606,7 +3645,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0001_02.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0001_02.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"189", + "code":"191", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Migration", @@ -3624,7 +3663,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"190", + "code":"192", "des":"PostgreSQL supports logical backups. You can use the pg_dump logical backup function to export backup files and then import them to RDS using psql.You can access RDS DB i", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"PostgreSQL,pg_dump,Migrating Data to RDS for PostgreSQL Using psql,Data Migration,User Guide", @@ -3642,7 +3681,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_10_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_10_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"191", + "code":"193", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameter Tuning", @@ -3660,7 +3699,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_10_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_10_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"192", + "code":"194", "des":"Parameters are key configuration items in a database system. Improper parameter settings may adversely affect the stable running of databases. This section describes some", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Suggestions on PostgreSQL Parameter Tuning,Parameter Tuning,User Guide", @@ -3678,7 +3717,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_07_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_07_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"193", + "code":"195", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management", @@ -3696,7 +3735,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_07_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_07_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"194", + "code":"196", "des":"This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,RDS,RDS,Creating a User and Granting Permissions,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -3714,7 +3753,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_07_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_07_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"195", + "code":"197", "des":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system policies of RDS.You can create custom policies in either of the following two ways:Visual editor: Select cloud ser", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,RDS Custom Policies,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -3732,7 +3771,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"196", + "code":"198", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instance Lifecycle", @@ -3750,7 +3789,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0055.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0055.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"197", + "code":"199", "des":"This section describes how to quickly create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one.You can create DB instances with the same configurations numer", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one,Creating a Same DB Instance as", @@ -3768,7 +3807,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_stop.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_stop.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"198", + "code":"200", "des":"If you use DB instances only for routine development, you can temporarily stop instances to save money. You can stop an instance for up to seven days.If you stop a primar", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Stopping a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -3786,7 +3825,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_start.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_start.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"199", + "code":"201", "des":"You can stop your instance temporarily to save money. After stopping your instance, you can restart it to begin using it again.If you start a primary instance, read repli", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Starting a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -3804,7 +3843,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"200", + "code":"202", "des":"You may need to reboot a DB instance during maintenance. For example, after modifying some parameters, a reboot is required for the modifications to take effect. You can ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Rebooting DB Instances or Read Replicas,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -3822,7 +3861,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_06_0022.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_06_0022.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"201", + "code":"203", "des":"You can customize which instance items are displayed on the Instances page.The following items are displayed by default: DB instance name/ID, DB instance type, DB engine ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"instance items,edit columns,Selecting Displayed Items,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -3840,7 +3879,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"202", + "code":"204", "des":"You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Exporting DB Instance Information,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -3858,7 +3897,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"203", + "code":"205", "des":"To release resources, you can delete DB instances or read replicas as required on the Instances page.DB instances cannot be deleted when operations are being performed on", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a DB Instance,Deleting a Read Replica,Deleting a DB Instance or Read Replica,Instance Lifec", @@ -3876,7 +3915,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_recycle.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_recycle.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"204", + "code":"206", "des":"Deleted DB instances can be moved to the recycle bin. You can rebuild DB instances from the recycle bin. The DB engine, DB engine version, and storage type of the new DB ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read replicas,Recycling a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -3894,7 +3933,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"205", + "code":"207", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instance Modifications", @@ -3912,7 +3951,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"206", + "code":"208", "des":"On the Overview page, you can get knowledge of the overall status of your RDS for PostgreSQL instance, including alarms, intelligent anomaly diagnosis, and key performanc", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Introduction to Instance Overview,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -3930,7 +3969,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"207", + "code":"209", "des":"RDS for PostgreSQL supports minor version upgrades to improve performance, add new functions, and fix bugs.When any new minor version is released to address vulnerabiliti", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Upgrading a Minor Version,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -3948,7 +3987,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_modify_instance_name.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_modify_instance_name.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"208", + "code":"210", "des":"You can change the name of a primary DB instance or read replica.Alternatively, click the target DB instance to go to the Overview page. Under DB Instance Name, click to", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"name,Changing a DB Instance Name,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -3966,7 +4005,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_modify_availability.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_modify_availability.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"209", + "code":"211", "des":"You can configure the failover priority for reliability or for availability, depending on your service requirements.Reliability: This option is selected by default. Data ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"failover priority,Changing the Failover Priority,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -3984,7 +4023,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_scale_rds.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_scale_rds.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"210", + "code":"212", "des":"You can change the instance class (CPU or memory) of a DB instance as required. If the status of a DB instance changes from Changing instance class to Available, the chan", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"CPU or memory,Changing a DB Instance Class,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -4002,7 +4041,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_scale_cluster.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_scale_cluster.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"211", + "code":"213", "des":"If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.You are advised to set alarm rules for the storage space u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"scale up storage space,scale up storage space,Scaling up Storage Space,Instance Modifications,User G", @@ -4020,7 +4059,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0084.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0084.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"212", + "code":"214", "des":"If the storage type of your RDS DB instance does not match your workloads, you can change it as needed.If the storage type of a read replica is different from that of its", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Storage Type,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -4038,7 +4077,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0039.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0039.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"213", + "code":"215", "des":"With storage autoscaling enabled, when RDS detects that you are running out of database space, it automatically scales up your storage.Autoscaling up the storage space of", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Storage Autoscaling,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -4056,7 +4095,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0038.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0038.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"214", + "code":"216", "des":"The maintenance window is 02:00–06:00 by default and you can change it as required. To prevent service interruptions, you are advised to set the maintenance window to off", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing the Maintenance Window,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -4074,7 +4113,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"215", + "code":"217", "des":"RDS enables you to change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances to improve instance reliability.Primary/standby DB instances support automatic failover. If ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances,Changing a DB Instance Type from Single t", @@ -4092,7 +4131,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_switch_ha.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_switch_ha.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"216", + "code":"218", "des":"If you choose to create primary/standby DB instances, RDS will create a primary DB instance and a synchronous standby DB instance in the same region. You can access the p", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Manually Switching Between Primary and Standby DB Instances,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -4110,7 +4149,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0060.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0060.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"217", + "code":"219", "des":"You can migrate a standby DB instance to another AZ in the same region as the original AZ.DDL operations and scheduled events will be suspended during migration. To preve", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migrating a Standby DB Instance,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -4128,7 +4167,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"218", + "code":"220", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read Replicas", @@ -4146,7 +4185,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"219", + "code":"221", "des":"RDS for PostgreSQL supports read replicas.In read-intensive scenarios, a single DB instance may be unable to handle the read pressure and service performance may be affec", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"read replicas,Introducing Read Replicas,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -4164,7 +4203,7 @@ "uri":"rds_add_read_replica_pg.html", "node_id":"rds_add_read_replica_pg.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"220", + "code":"222", "des":"Read replicas are used to enhance the read capabilities and reduce the load on primary DB instances.You can create read replicas as needed.A maximum of five read replicas", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create read replicas,Creating a Read Replica,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -4182,7 +4221,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"221", + "code":"223", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"read replica,Managing a Read Replica,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -4200,7 +4239,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0034.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0034.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"222", + "code":"224", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backups and Restorations", @@ -4218,7 +4257,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_backup_restore.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_backup_restore.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"223", + "code":"225", "des":"RDS supports backups and restorations to ensure data reliability.Automated backups are created during the backup time window for your DB instances. RDS saves automated ba", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"backups and restorations,Automated backups,Manual backups,Working with Backups,Backups and Restorati", @@ -4236,7 +4275,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0027.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0027.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"224", + "code":"226", "des":"When you create a DB instance, an automated backup policy is enabled by default. For security purposes, the automated backup policy cannot be disabled. After the DB insta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring an Automated Backup Policy,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -4254,7 +4293,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0028.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0028.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"225", + "code":"227", "des":"RDS allows you to create manual backups of a running primary DB instance. You can use these backups to restore data.When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create manual backups,Creating a Manual Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -4272,7 +4311,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0031.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0031.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"226", + "code":"228", "des":"This section describes how to download a manual or an automated backup file to a local device and restore data from the backup file.RDS for PostgreSQL enables you to down", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"download a manual or an automated backup file,full backup files,Downloading a Full Backup File,Backu", @@ -4290,7 +4329,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0138.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0138.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"227", + "code":"229", "des":"This section describes how to download a manual or an automated backup file to a local device and restore data from the backup file.RDS for PostgreSQL enables you to down", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"automated backup,incremental backup files,Downloading an Incremental Backup File,Backups and Restora", @@ -4308,7 +4347,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0030.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0030.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"228", + "code":"230", "des":"This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created. The restoration is at the DB instance ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Restoring from Backup Files to RDS for PostgreSQL,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -4326,7 +4365,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0029.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0029.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"229", + "code":"231", "des":"You can restore from automated backups to a specified point in time.RDS for PostgreSQL supports restoration to a new, the original, or an existing DB instance.When you en", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"to a specified point in time,RDS for PostgreSQL,restoration to a new, the original,,Restoring a DB I", @@ -4344,7 +4383,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0032.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0032.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"230", + "code":"232", "des":"This section describes how to replicate a manual or an automated backup. The new backup name must be different from the original backup name.You can replicate backups and", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"replicate a manual or an automated backup,Replicating a Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -4362,7 +4401,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0033.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0033.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"231", + "code":"233", "des":"You can delete manual backups to free up backup storage.Deleted manual backups cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.The following backups ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Manual Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -4380,7 +4419,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0034.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0034.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"232", + "code":"234", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameter Template Management", @@ -4398,7 +4437,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_parameter_group.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_parameter_group.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"233", + "code":"235", "des":"You can use database parameter templates to manage the DB engine configuration. A database parameter template acts as a container for engine configuration values that can", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4416,7 +4455,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_configuration.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_configuration.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"234", + "code":"236", "des":"You can modify parameters in a custom parameter template to optimize RDS database performance.You can change parameter values in custom parameter templates only and canno", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying Instance Parameters,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4434,7 +4473,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0042.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0042.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"235", + "code":"237", "des":"You can export a parameter template of a DB instance for future use. You can also apply the exported parameter template to DB instances by referring to Applying a Paramet", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Exporting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4452,7 +4491,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0035.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0035.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"236", + "code":"238", "des":"You can compare DB instance parameters with a parameter template that uses the same DB engine to understand the differences of parameter settings.You can also compare def", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Compare,Comparing Parameter Templates,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4470,7 +4509,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0099.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0099.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"237", + "code":"239", "des":"You can view the change history of DB instance parameters or custom parameter templates.An exported or custom parameter template has initially a blank change history.You ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Parameter Change History,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4488,7 +4527,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0036.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0036.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"238", + "code":"240", "des":"You can replicate a parameter template you have created. When you have already created a parameter template and want to include most of the custom parameters and values f", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Replicating a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4506,7 +4545,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0037.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0037.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"239", + "code":"241", "des":"You can reset all parameters in a custom parameter template to their default settings.If the DB instance status is Parameter change. Pending reboot, a reboot is required ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resetting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4524,7 +4563,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"240", + "code":"242", "des":"You can apply parameter templates to DB instances as needed. A parameter template can be applied only to DB instances of the same version.If you intend to apply a default", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Applying a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4542,7 +4581,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0098.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0098.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"241", + "code":"243", "des":"You can view the application records of a parameter template.You can view the name or ID of the DB instance that the parameter template applies to, as well as the applica", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Application Records of a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4560,7 +4599,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0038.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0038.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"242", + "code":"244", "des":"You can modify the description of a parameter template you have created.You cannot modify the description of a default parameter template.The description consists of a ma", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying a Parameter Template Description,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4578,7 +4617,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0039.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0039.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"243", + "code":"245", "des":"You can delete a custom parameter template that is no longer in use.Deleted parameter templates cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.Defau", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -4596,7 +4635,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"244", + "code":"246", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connection Management", @@ -4614,7 +4653,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"245", + "code":"247", "des":"You can change floating IP addresses after migrating on-premises databases or other cloud databases to RDS.After a floating IP address is changed, the domain name needs t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change floating IP addresses,automatically-assigned IP address,change the floating IP address,Config", @@ -4632,7 +4671,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"246", + "code":"248", "des":"You can change the private domain name of your DB instance and connect to the instance using the new domain name.Only the prefix of a private domain name can be modified.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Private Domain Name,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -4650,7 +4689,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_public_accessibility.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_public_accessibility.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"247", + "code":"249", "des":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility, and you c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Binding and Unbinding an EIP,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -4668,7 +4707,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_change_database_port.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_change_database_port.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"248", + "code":"250", "des":"This section describes how to change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the database port of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica,Changing a Database Port,Connect", @@ -4686,7 +4725,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"249", + "code":"251", "des":"You can use the pgAdmin client to connect to an RDS DB instance.The pgAdmin version must be 4 or later.Prepare an ECS or a device that can access RDS DB instances.To conn", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"pgAdmin,Connecting to a DB Instance Through pgAdmin,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -4704,7 +4743,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0029.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0029.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"250", + "code":"252", "des":"SSL is enabled by default when you create an RDS for PostgreSQL DB instance and cannot be disabled after the instance is created. SSL encryption ensures that all communic", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring SSL Encryption,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -4722,7 +4761,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0046.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0046.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"251", + "code":"253", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Plugin Management", @@ -4740,7 +4779,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0070.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0070.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"252", + "code":"254", "des":"RDS allows you to install and uninstall plugins on the console.RDS for PostgreSQL plugins only take effect on the databases you created the plugins for. To use a plugin o", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Installing and Uninstalling a Plugin on the RDS Console,Plugin Management,User Guide", @@ -4758,7 +4797,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0043.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0043.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"253", + "code":"255", "des":"RDS provides the PostgreSQL plugin management solution for user root. Except the following plugins, you need to manually create other plugins by referring to this section", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Installing and Uninstalling a Plugin Using SQL Commands,Plugin Management,User Guide", @@ -4776,7 +4815,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0045.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0045.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"254", + "code":"256", "des":"The following table lists the plugins supported by the latest minor versions of RDS for PostgreSQL. You can use SELECT name FROM pg_available_extensions; to view the plug", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Supported Plugins,Plugin Management,User Guide", @@ -4794,7 +4833,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0062.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0062.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"255", + "code":"257", "des":"RDS for PostgreSQL supports the pgvector plugin, which allows for vector data type and vector similarity search. This plugin supports:Exact and approximate nearest neighb", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"pgvector,Plugin Management,User Guide", @@ -4812,7 +4851,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0064.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0064.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"256", + "code":"258", "des":"The pg_stat_statements extension provides a means for tracking planning and execution statistics of all SQL statements executed by a server.For more information, see pg_s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"pg_stat_statements,Plugin Management,User Guide", @@ -4830,7 +4869,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0065.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0065.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"257", + "code":"259", "des":"To prevent highly concurrent SQL statements that consume too many resources from causing instance instability, RDS for PostgreSQL provides rds_pg_sql_ccl, ccl is short fo", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"rds_pg_sql_ccl,Plugin Management,User Guide", @@ -4848,7 +4887,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0044.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0044.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"258", + "code":"260", "des":"RDS provides the PostgreSQL tablespace management solution based on user root.# psql --host=--port= --dbname=--username=root -c\"select cont", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"PostgreSQL tablespace,Tablespace Management,Working with RDS for PostgreSQL,User Guide", @@ -4866,7 +4905,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"259", + "code":"261", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Problem Diagnosis and SQL Analysis", @@ -4884,7 +4923,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0037.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0037.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"260", + "code":"262", "des":"DBA Assistant provides visualized database O&M and intelligent diagnosis for developers and database administrators (DBAs), making database O&M easy and efficient. By ana", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Function Overview,Problem Diagnosis and SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -4902,7 +4941,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_10_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_10_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"261", + "code":"263", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Performance Monitoring", @@ -4920,7 +4959,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0027.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0027.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"262", + "code":"264", "des":"DBA Assistant allows you to view the performance metrics of your DB instance. Historical trends of performance metrics within a specified time period help you learn about", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Performance Metrics of a DB Instance,Performance Monitoring,User Guide", @@ -4938,7 +4977,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_10_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_10_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"263", + "code":"265", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Problem Diagnosis", @@ -4956,7 +4995,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0039.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0039.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"264", + "code":"266", "des":"You can kill sessions when necessary on the Sessions that Can Be Killed If Necessary tab page. This page covers:Emergency Channel: If the maximum number of connections fo", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Killing Sessions,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -4974,7 +5013,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"265", + "code":"267", "des":"You can query session snapshots of your instance while sorting, filtering, and displaying the snapshots as needed. You can also view session statistics by user, source, a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Real-Time Sessions,Problem Diagnosis,User Guide", @@ -4992,7 +5031,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_10_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_10_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"266", + "code":"268", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SQL Analysis", @@ -5010,7 +5049,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0030.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0030.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"267", + "code":"269", "des":"Slow Query Log displays a chart of SQL statements that are taking too long to execute and allows you to sort slow SQL statements by multiple dimensions, such as by user, ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Slow Query Logs of a DB Instance,SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -5028,7 +5067,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0032.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0032.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"268", + "code":"270", "des":"SQL Insights allows you to not only query all executed SQL statements, but also analyze and search for the tables that are accessed and updated most frequently, and the S", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a SQL Insights Task,SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -5046,7 +5085,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_08_0033.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_08_0033.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"269", + "code":"271", "des":"You can create rules to control concurrent execution of SQL statements by specifying original SQL statements or query ID. When the number of matched SQL statements exceed", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a SQL Throttling Rule,SQL Analysis,User Guide", @@ -5064,7 +5103,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"270", + "code":"272", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Security", @@ -5082,7 +5121,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_reset_password.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_reset_password.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"271", + "code":"273", "des":"You can reset the administrator password of a primary instance.You can also reset the password of your database account when using RDS.If you have changed the administrat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"reset the administrator password,RDS,Resetting the Administrator Password,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -5100,7 +5139,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"272", + "code":"274", "des":"This section describes how to change the security group of a primary DB instance or read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the security group of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Security Group,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -5118,7 +5157,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0041.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0041.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"273", + "code":"275", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Metrics and Alarms", @@ -5136,7 +5175,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_06_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_06_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"274", + "code":"276", "des":"The RDS Agent monitors RDS DB instances and collects monitoring metrics only.This section describes the metrics that can be monitored by Cloud Eye as well as their namesp", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring Displayed Metrics,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -5154,7 +5193,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_06_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_06_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"275", + "code":"277", "des":"You can set alarm rules by referring to Setting Alarm Rules to customize the monitored objects and notification policies and keep track of the RDS running status.The RDS ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"alarm rule,Setting Alarm Rules,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -5172,7 +5211,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_06_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_06_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"276", + "code":"278", "des":"Cloud Eye monitors the statuses of RDS DB instances. You can view RDS monitoring metrics on the management console.Monitored data takes some time before it can be display", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Monitoring Metrics,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -5190,7 +5229,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0042.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0042.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"277", + "code":"279", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Interconnection with CTS", @@ -5208,7 +5247,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_06_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_06_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"278", + "code":"280", "des":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations related to RDS for further query, audit, and backtrack.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS),Key Operations Supported by CTS,Interconnection with CTS,User Guide", @@ -5226,7 +5265,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_06_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_06_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"279", + "code":"281", "des":"After CTS is enabled, operations on cloud resources are recorded. You can view the operation records of the last 7 days on the CTS console.This section describes how to q", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Tracing Events,Interconnection with CTS,User Guide", @@ -5244,7 +5283,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_001.html", "node_id":"rds_08_001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"280", + "code":"282", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Log Management", @@ -5262,7 +5301,7 @@ "uri":"rds_recent_log.html", "node_id":"rds_recent_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"281", + "code":"283", "des":"Error logs contain logs generated during the database running. These can help you analyze problems with the database.You can select a log level in the upper right corner ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Error Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -5280,7 +5319,7 @@ "uri":"slow_query_log-pg.html", "node_id":"slow_query_log-pg.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"282", + "code":"284", "des":"Slow query logs record statements that exceed the log_min_duration_statement value. You can view log details to identify statements that are slowly executed and optimize ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Slow Query Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -5298,7 +5337,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0007.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0007.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"283", + "code":"285", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Center", @@ -5316,7 +5355,7 @@ "uri":"rds_task_pg_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_task_pg_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"284", + "code":"286", "des":"You can view the detailed progress and result of the task on the Task Center page.You can view and manage the following tasks:Creating DB instancesCreating read replicasC", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing a Task,Task Center,User Guide", @@ -5334,7 +5373,7 @@ "uri":"rds_task_pg_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_task_pg_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"285", + "code":"287", "des":"You can delete task records so that they are no longer displayed in the task list. This operation only deletes the task records, and does not delete the DB instances or t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Task Record,Task Center,User Guide", @@ -5352,7 +5391,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0048.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0048.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"286", + "code":"288", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Major Version Upgrade", @@ -5370,7 +5409,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_05_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_05_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"287", + "code":"289", "des":"RDS for PostgreSQL allows you to upgrade the major version of your DB instance in either of the following methods:Upgrade without cutover: You can use it to test service ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Upgrading the Major Version of a DB Instance on the Console,Major Version Upgrade,User Guide", @@ -5388,7 +5427,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_tag.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_tag.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"288", + "code":"290", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Managing Tags,Working with RDS for PostgreSQL,User Guide", @@ -5406,7 +5445,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"289", + "code":"291", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Working with RDS for SQL Server", @@ -5424,7 +5463,7 @@ "uri":"rds_mssql_10_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_mssql_10_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"290", + "code":"292", "des":"Do not use instances with 2 vCPUs and 4 GB memory for production workloads. Such instances are provided only for experience testing.Use instances with at least 4 vCPUs an", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Suggestions on Using RDS for SQL Server,Working with RDS for SQL Server,User Guide", @@ -5442,7 +5481,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0001_02.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0001_02.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"291", + "code":"293", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Migration", @@ -5460,7 +5499,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0035.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0035.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"292", + "code":"294", "des":"You can access RDS DB instances through an EIP or ECS.Prepare an ECS for accessing DB instances in the same VPC or prepare a device for accessing RDS through an EIP. To c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migrating Data to RDS for SQL Server Using SQL Server Management Studio,Data Migration,User Guide", @@ -5478,7 +5517,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_07_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_07_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"293", + "code":"295", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management", @@ -5496,7 +5535,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_07_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_07_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"294", + "code":"296", "des":"This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,RDS,RDS,Creating a User and Granting Permissions,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -5514,7 +5553,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_07_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_07_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"295", + "code":"297", "des":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system policies of RDS.You can create custom policies in either of the following two ways:Visual editor: Select cloud ser", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,RDS Custom Policies,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -5532,7 +5571,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"296", + "code":"298", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instance Lifecycle", @@ -5550,7 +5589,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0055.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0055.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"297", + "code":"299", "des":"This section describes how to quickly create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one.You can create DB instances with the same configurations numer", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one,Creating a Same DB Instance as", @@ -5568,7 +5607,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"298", + "code":"300", "des":"You may need to reboot a DB instance during maintenance. For example, after modifying some parameters, a reboot is required for the modifications to take effect. You can ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Rebooting DB Instances or Read Replicas,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -5586,7 +5625,7 @@ "uri":"rds_mssql_stop.html", "node_id":"rds_mssql_stop.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"299", + "code":"301", "des":"If you use DB instances only for routine development, you can temporarily stop instances to save money. You can stop an instance for up to 15 days.After a DB instance is ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Stopping a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -5604,7 +5643,7 @@ "uri":"rds_mssql_start.html", "node_id":"rds_mssql_start.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"300", + "code":"302", "des":"You can stop your instance temporarily to save money. After stopping your instance, you can restart it to begin using it again.After a DB instance is started, the VM wher", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Starting a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -5622,7 +5661,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0022.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0022.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"301", + "code":"303", "des":"You can customize which instance items are displayed on the Instances page.The following items are displayed by default: DB instance name/ID, DB instance type, DB engine ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"instance items,edit columns,Selecting Displayed Items,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -5640,7 +5679,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0017.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0017.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"302", + "code":"304", "des":"You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Exporting DB Instance Information,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -5658,7 +5697,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0030.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0030.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"303", + "code":"305", "des":"To release resources, you can delete DB instances or read replicas as required on the Instances page.DB instances cannot be deleted when operations are being performed on", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a DB Instance,Deleting a Read Replica,Deleting a DB Instance or Read Replica,Instance Lifec", @@ -5676,7 +5715,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_recycle.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_recycle.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"304", + "code":"306", "des":"Deleted DB instances can be moved to the recycle bin. You can rebuild DB instances from the recycle bin. The DB engine, DB engine version, and storage type of the new DB ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read replicas,Recycling a DB Instance,Instance Lifecycle,User Guide", @@ -5694,7 +5733,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0008.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0008.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"305", + "code":"307", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instance Modifications", @@ -5712,7 +5751,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0117.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0117.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"306", + "code":"308", "des":"On the Overview page, you can get knowledge of the overall status of your RDS for SQL Server instance, including alarms, intelligent anomaly diagnosis, and key performanc", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Introduction to Instance Overview,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5730,7 +5769,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_modify_instance_name.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_modify_instance_name.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"307", + "code":"309", "des":"You can change the name of a primary DB instance or read replica.Alternatively, click the target DB instance to go to the Overview page. Under DB Instance Name, click to", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"name,Changing a DB Instance Name,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5748,7 +5787,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_modify_availability.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_modify_availability.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"308", + "code":"310", "des":"You can configure the failover priority for reliability or for availability, depending on your service requirements.Reliability: This option is selected by default. Data ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"failover priority,Changing the Failover Priority,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5766,7 +5805,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_scale_rds.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_scale_rds.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"309", + "code":"311", "des":"You can change the instance class (CPU or memory) of a DB instance as required. If the status of a DB instance changes from Changing instance class to Available, the chan", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"CPU or memory,Changing a DB Instance Class,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5784,7 +5823,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0050.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0050.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"310", + "code":"312", "des":"If the storage type of your DB instance does not match your workloads, you can change it as needed.If the storage type of a read replica is different from that of its ass", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Storage Type,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5802,7 +5841,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_scale_cluster.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_scale_cluster.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"311", + "code":"313", "des":"If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.You are advised to set alarm rules for the storage space u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"scale up storage space,scale up storage space,Scaling up Storage Space,Instance Modifications,User G", @@ -5820,7 +5859,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0029.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0029.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"312", + "code":"314", "des":"With storage autoscaling enabled, when RDS detects that you are running out of database space, it automatically scales up your storage.Autoscaling up the storage space of", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring Autoscaling,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5838,7 +5877,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0038.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0038.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"313", + "code":"315", "des":"The maintenance window is 02:00–06:00 by default and you can change it as required. To prevent service interruptions, you are advised to set the maintenance window to off", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing the Maintenance Window,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5856,7 +5895,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"314", + "code":"316", "des":"RDS enables you to change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances to improve instance reliability.Primary/standby DB instances support automatic failover. If ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances,Changing a DB Instance Type from Single t", @@ -5874,7 +5913,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_switch_ha.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_switch_ha.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"315", + "code":"317", "des":"If you choose to create primary/standby DB instances, RDS will create a primary DB instance and a synchronous standby DB instance in the same region. You can access the p", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Manually Switching Between Primary and Standby DB Instances,Instance Modifications,User Guide", @@ -5892,7 +5931,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_11_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_11_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"316", + "code":"318", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Read Replicas", @@ -5910,7 +5949,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_11_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_11_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"317", + "code":"319", "des":"Only RDS for SQL Server 2022 Enterprise Edition, 2019 Enterprise Edition and 2017 Enterprise Edition support read replicas.In read-intensive scenarios, a single DB instan", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"read replicas,Introducing Read Replicas,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -5928,7 +5967,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0011.html", "node_id":"rds_03_0011.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"318", + "code":"320", "des":"Read replicas are used to enhance the read capabilities and reduce the load on primary DB instances.After a DB instance has been created, you can create read replicas for", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create read replicas,read replicas,Creating a Read Replica,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -5946,7 +5985,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_11_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_11_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"319", + "code":"321", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"read replica,Managing a Read Replica,Read Replicas,User Guide", @@ -5964,7 +6003,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0034.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0034.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"320", + "code":"322", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backups and Restorations", @@ -5982,7 +6021,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_backup_restore.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_backup_restore.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"321", + "code":"323", "des":"RDS supports DB instance backups and restorations to ensure data reliability.Automated backups are created during the backup period of your DB instances. RDS saves automa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"backups and restorations,Automated backups,Manual backups,Working with Backups,Backups and Restorati", @@ -6000,7 +6039,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0031.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0031.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"322", + "code":"324", "des":"When you create a DB instance, an automated backup policy is enabled by default. For security purposes, the automated backup policy cannot be disabled. After the DB insta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring an Intra-Region Backup Policy,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6018,7 +6057,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0010.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0010.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"323", + "code":"325", "des":"RDS allows you to create manual backups of a running primary DB instance. You can use these backups to restore data.When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"create manual backups,Creating a Manual Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6036,7 +6075,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0013.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0013.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"324", + "code":"326", "des":"This section describes how to download a manual backup or an automated backup to a local device and restore data from the backup file.If the size of the backup data is gr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"automated backup,Downloading a Backup File,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6054,7 +6093,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"325", + "code":"327", "des":"This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created.Alternatively, click the target DB inst", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Restoring from Backup Files to RDS for SQL Server,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6072,7 +6111,7 @@ "uri":"rds_05_0044.html", "node_id":"rds_05_0044.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"326", + "code":"328", "des":"You can download backup files by referring to section Downloading a Backup File and restore data from them. You can use SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS) to connect to ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Restoring from Backup Files to a Self-Built SQL Server Database,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6090,7 +6129,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0022.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0022.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"327", + "code":"329", "des":"You can restore from automated backups to a specified point in time.RDS for Microsoft SQL Server supports restoration to a new, the original, or an existing DB instance.I", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"restoration to a new, the original,Restoring a DB Instance to a Point in Time,Backups and Restoratio", @@ -6108,7 +6147,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0055.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0055.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"328", + "code":"330", "des":"This section describes how to replicate a manual or an automated backup. The new backup name must be different from the original backup name.You can replicate backups and", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"replicate a manual or an automated backup,Replicating a Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6126,7 +6165,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0101.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0101.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"329", + "code":"331", "des":"You can delete manual backups to free up backup storage.Deleted manual backups cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.The following backups ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Manual Backup,Backups and Restorations,User Guide", @@ -6144,7 +6183,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0102.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0102.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"330", + "code":"332", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameter Template Management", @@ -6162,7 +6201,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_parameter_group.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_parameter_group.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"331", + "code":"333", "des":"You can use database parameter templates to manage the DB engine configuration. A database parameter template acts as a container for engine configuration values that can", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6180,7 +6219,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_configuration.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_configuration.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"332", + "code":"334", "des":"You can modify parameters in a custom parameter template to optimize RDS database performance.You can only change parameter values in custom parameter templates. You cann", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying Parameters,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6198,7 +6237,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_08_0042.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_08_0042.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"333", + "code":"335", "des":"You can export a parameter template of a DB instance for future use. You can also apply the exported parameter template to DB instances by referring to Applying a Paramet", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Exporting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6216,7 +6255,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0103.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0103.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"334", + "code":"336", "des":"You can compare DB instance parameters with a parameter template that uses the same DB engine to understand the differences of parameter settings.You can also compare def", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Compare,Comparing Parameter Templates,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6234,7 +6273,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0099.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0099.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"335", + "code":"337", "des":"You can view the change history of DB instance parameters or custom parameter templates.An exported or custom parameter template has initially a blank change history.You ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Parameter Change History,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6252,7 +6291,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0104.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0104.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"336", + "code":"338", "des":"You can replicate a parameter template you have created. When you have already created a parameter template and want to include most of the custom parameters and values f", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Replicating a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6270,7 +6309,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0105.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0105.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"337", + "code":"339", "des":"You can reset all parameters in a custom parameter template to their default settings.If the DB instance status is Parameter change. Pending reboot, a reboot is required ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resetting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6288,7 +6327,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"338", + "code":"340", "des":"You can apply parameter templates to DB instances as needed. A parameter template can be applied only to DB instances of the same version.If you intend to apply a default", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Applying a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6306,7 +6345,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0098.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0098.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"339", + "code":"341", "des":"You can view the application records of a parameter template.You can view the name or ID of the DB instance that the parameter template applies to, as well as the applica", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Application Records of a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6324,7 +6363,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0106.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0106.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"340", + "code":"342", "des":"You can modify the description of a parameter template you have created.You cannot modify the description of a default parameter template.The description consists of a ma", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying a Parameter Template Description,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6342,7 +6381,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0107.html", "node_id":"rds_10_0107.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"341", + "code":"343", "des":"You can delete a custom parameter template that is no longer in use.Deleted parameter templates cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.Defau", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Parameter Template,Parameter Template Management,User Guide", @@ -6360,7 +6399,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"342", + "code":"344", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Connection Management", @@ -6378,7 +6417,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"343", + "code":"345", "des":"You can change floating IP addresses after migrating on-premises databases or other cloud databases to RDS.After a floating IP address is changed, the domain name needs t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change floating IP addresses,self-configured floating IP address,Configuring and Changing a Floating", @@ -6396,7 +6435,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"344", + "code":"346", "des":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility, and you c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Binding and Unbinding an EIP,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -6414,7 +6453,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_change_database_port.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_change_database_port.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"345", + "code":"347", "des":"This section describes how to change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the database port of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica,Changing a Database Port,Connect", @@ -6432,7 +6471,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"346", + "code":"348", "des":"You can apply for a private domain name and connect to your RDS DB instance through the private domain name.After a private domain name is generated, changing the floatin", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS,Applying for and Changing a Private Domain Name,Connection Management,User Guide", @@ -6450,7 +6489,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"347", + "code":"349", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Security", @@ -6468,7 +6507,7 @@ "uri":"en-us_topic_sqlserver_reset_password.html", "node_id":"en-us_topic_sqlserver_reset_password.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"348", + "code":"350", "des":"You can reset the administrator password only through the primary DB instance.You can also reset the password of your database account when using RDS.If you have changed ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"reset the administrator password,Resetting the Administrator Password,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -6486,7 +6525,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0032.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0032.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"349", + "code":"351", "des":"This section describes how to change the security group of a primary DB instance or read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the security group of the pri", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Changing a Security Group,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -6504,7 +6543,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"350", + "code":"352", "des":"Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) encrypts data files and backup files using certificates to implement real-time I/O encryption and decryption. This function effectively ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring the TDE Function,Data Security,User Guide", @@ -6522,7 +6561,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_01_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_01_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"351", + "code":"353", "des":"The participator, transaction-supported server, resource server, and transaction manager of a distributed transaction are deployed on different nodes in a distributed sys", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Distributed Transactions,Working with RDS for SQL Server,User Guide", @@ -6540,7 +6579,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"352", + "code":"354", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Metrics and Alarms", @@ -6558,7 +6597,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"353", + "code":"355", "des":"The RDS Agent monitors RDS DB instances and collects monitoring metrics only.This section describes the metrics that can be monitored by Cloud Eye as well as their namesp", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Configuring Displayed Metrics,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -6576,7 +6615,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"354", + "code":"356", "des":"You can set alarm rules by referring to Setting Alarm Rules to customize the monitored objects and notification policies and keep track of the RDS running status.The RDS ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"alarm rule,Setting Alarm Rules,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -6594,7 +6633,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"355", + "code":"357", "des":"Cloud Eye monitors the statuses of RDS DB instances. You can view RDS monitoring metrics on the management console.Monitored data takes some time before it can be display", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Monitoring Metrics,Metrics and Alarms,User Guide", @@ -6612,7 +6651,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_01_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_01_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"356", + "code":"358", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Interconnection with CTS", @@ -6630,7 +6669,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"357", + "code":"359", "des":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations related to RDS for further query, audit, and backtrack.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS),Key Operations Supported by CTS,Interconnection with CTS,User Guide", @@ -6648,7 +6687,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_06_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"358", + "code":"360", "des":"After CTS is enabled, operations on cloud resources are recorded. You can view the operation records of the last 7 days on the CTS console.This section describes how to q", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Tracing Events,Interconnection with CTS,User Guide", @@ -6666,7 +6705,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_log.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_log.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"359", + "code":"361", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Log Management", @@ -6684,7 +6723,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_01_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_01_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"360", + "code":"362", "des":"System logs contain logs generated during the database running. These can help you analyze problems with the database.You can select a log level in the upper right corner", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing System Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -6702,7 +6741,7 @@ "uri":"slow_query_log-sqlserver.html", "node_id":"slow_query_log-sqlserver.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"361", + "code":"363", "des":"Slow query logs record statements that exceed long_query_time (1 second by default). You can view log details to identify statements that are executing slowly and optimiz", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing and Downloading Slow Query Logs,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -6720,7 +6759,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_dba.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_dba.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"362", + "code":"364", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DBA Assistant", @@ -6738,7 +6777,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_dba_01.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_dba_01.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"363", + "code":"365", "des":"DBA Assistant provides you with a range of database O&M functions, making it easy to diagnose database problems, locate faults, analyze and optimize database performance.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Function Overview,DBA Assistant,User Guide", @@ -6756,7 +6795,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_dba_02.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_dba_02.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"364", + "code":"366", "des":"RDS for SQL Server provides space monitoring and analysis by instance, database, and even table, helping you quickly learn about space information and identify space prob", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Storage Analysis,DBA Assistant,User Guide", @@ -6774,7 +6813,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0007.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_05_0007.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"365", + "code":"367", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Center", @@ -6792,7 +6831,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_task_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_task_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"366", + "code":"368", "des":"You can view the progress and results of tasks on the Task Center page.You can view and manage the following tasks:Creating DB instancesCreating read replicasChanging sin", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing a Task,Task Center,User Guide", @@ -6810,7 +6849,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_task_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_task_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"367", + "code":"369", "des":"You can delete task records so that they are no longer displayed in the task list. This operation only deletes the task records, and does not delete the DB instances or t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Deleting a Task Record,Task Center,User Guide", @@ -6828,7 +6867,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"368", + "code":"370", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Usage of Stored Procedures", @@ -6846,7 +6885,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0009.html", "node_id":"rds_09_0009.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"369", + "code":"371", "des":"You can use a stored procedure to update statistics to improve query performance.An RDS Microsoft SQL Server DB instance has been connected. For details about how to conn", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Updating Database Statistics,Usage of Stored Procedures,User Guide", @@ -6864,7 +6903,7 @@ "uri":"rds_sqlserver_tag.html", "node_id":"rds_sqlserver_tag.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"370", + "code":"372", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Managing Tags,Working with RDS for SQL Server,User Guide", @@ -6882,7 +6921,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_11_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"371", + "code":"373", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Best Practices", @@ -6903,7 +6942,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"372", + "code":"374", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"RDS for PostgreSQL", @@ -6924,7 +6963,7 @@ "uri":"rds_pg_11_0011.html", "node_id":"rds_pg_11_0011.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"373", + "code":"375", "des":"PostgreSQL has earned a reputation for reliability, stability, and data consistency, and has become the preferred choice as an open-source relational database for many en", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Security Best Practices,RDS for PostgreSQL,User Guide", @@ -6945,7 +6984,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0000.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0000.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"374", + "code":"376", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"FAQs", @@ -6966,7 +7005,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0146.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0146.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"375", + "code":"377", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Product Consulting", @@ -6987,7 +7026,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"376", + "code":"378", "des":"DB instance operating systems (OSs) are invisible to you. Your applications can access a database only through an IP address and a port.The backup files stored in Object ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Pay Attention to When Using RDS?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7008,7 +7047,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0002.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0002.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"377", + "code":"379", "des":"Calculation formula for RDS DB instance availability:DB instance availability = (1 – Failure duration/Total service duration) × 100%", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Is the Availability of RDS DB Instances?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7029,7 +7068,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0003.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0003.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"378", + "code":"380", "des":"Currently, DB instance cannot be created using a template.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Use a Template to Create DB Instances?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7050,7 +7089,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0004.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0004.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"379", + "code":"381", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between RDS and Other Database Solutions?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7071,7 +7110,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0005.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0005.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"380", + "code":"382", "des":"No. Your RDS DB instances and resources are isolated from other users' DB instances.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Will My RDS DB Instances Be Affected by Other User Instances?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7092,7 +7131,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0073.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0073.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"381", + "code":"383", "des":"Yes. RDS supports cross-AZ high availability. When you create primary/standby DB instances, you can select different AZs for them.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does RDS Support Cross-AZ High Availability?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7113,7 +7152,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0104.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0104.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"382", + "code":"384", "des":"No. RDS single DB instances can be changed to primary/standby DB instances, but not the other way around.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can RDS Primary/Standby DB Instances Be Changed to Single DB Instances?,Product Consulting,User Guid", @@ -7134,7 +7173,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0110.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0110.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"383", + "code":"385", "des":"The default code is utf8. You need to convert the default code to Unicode in the exported Excel file.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If Garbled Characters Are Displayed After SQL Query Results Are Exported to an Exce", @@ -7155,7 +7194,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0008.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0008.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"384", + "code":"386", "des":"To solve this problem:Check the performance of RDS DB instances on the RDS console.Compare the database connection status of local databases and RDS DB instances. This pr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do About Slow Respond of Websites When They Use RDS?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7176,7 +7215,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0065.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0065.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"385", + "code":"387", "des":"RDS provides the high availability. Select the primary/standby mode.Also called an unplanned handover. If the primary DB instance fails, the system will automatically swi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Does a Cloud Database Perform a Primary/Standby Switchover?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7197,7 +7236,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0013.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0013.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"386", + "code":"388", "des":"Multiple ECSs can connect to the same RDS DB instance as long as the capability limits of a database are not exceeded.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can Multiple ECSs Connect to the Same RDS DB Instance?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -7218,7 +7257,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0094.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0094.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"387", + "code":"389", "des":"An error shown in Figure 1 is reported on SQL Server Management Studio when a database is being deleted from RDS SQL Server primary/standby DB instances.The database 'xxx", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Is an Error Reported When I Attempt to Delete a Database from RDS SQL Server Primary/Standby DB ", @@ -7239,7 +7278,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0145.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0145.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"388", + "code":"390", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resource and Disk Management", @@ -7260,7 +7299,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0049.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0049.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"389", + "code":"391", "des":"The following logs and files occupy RDS storage space.If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.If d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"scale up storage space,Which Types of Logs and Files Occupy RDS Storage Space?,Resource and Disk Man", @@ -7281,7 +7320,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0047.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0047.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"390", + "code":"392", "des":"Both your common data (excluding backup data) and the data required for the operation of your DB instances (such as system database data, rollback logs, redo logs, and in", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Which Items Occupy the Storage Space of My RDS DB Instances?,Resource and Disk Management,User Guide", @@ -7302,7 +7341,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0048.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0048.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"391", + "code":"393", "des":"The storage space you applied for will include space for the file system overhead required for inode, reserved block, and database operations.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Overhead Does the Storage Space Have After I Applied for an RDS DB Instance?,Resource and Disk ", @@ -7323,7 +7362,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0082.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0082.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"392", + "code":"394", "des":"Data Definition Language (DDL) operations may increase storage space usage sharply. To ensure that services are running properly, do not perform DDL operations during pea", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Much Storage Space Is Required for DDL Operations?,Resource and Disk Management,User Guide", @@ -7344,7 +7383,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0006.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0006.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"393", + "code":"395", "des":"There are no limitations on the number of DB instances running on RDS.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Many DB Instances Can Run on RDS?,Resource and Disk Management,User Guide", @@ -7365,7 +7404,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0007.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0007.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"394", + "code":"396", "des":"The maximum number of databases that can run on an RDS DB instance depends on the DB engine settings.If there are enough CPU, memory, and storage resources, there are no ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Many Databases Can Run on an RDS DB Instance?,Resource and Disk Management,User Guide", @@ -7386,7 +7425,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0141.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0141.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"395", + "code":"397", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Connection", @@ -7407,7 +7446,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0018.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0018.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"396", + "code":"398", "des":"For a DB instance that has an EIP bound, you can access it through the EIP.Enable a VPN in a VPC and use the VPN to connect to the RDS DB instance.Create an RDS and an EC", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can an External Server Access the RDS Database?,Database Connection,User Guide", @@ -7428,7 +7467,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0019.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0019.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"397", + "code":"399", "des":"The number of database connections indicates the number of applications that can be simultaneously connected to a database, and is irrelevant to the maximum number of use", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Do I Do If the Number of RDS Database Connections Reaches the Upper Limit?,Database Connection,", @@ -7449,7 +7488,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0055.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0055.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"398", + "code":"400", "des":"RDS does not have constraints on the number of connections. This number is determined by the default value and value range of the DB engine. For example, you can set max_", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Is the Maximum Number of Connections to an RDS DB Instance?,Database Connection,User Guide", @@ -7470,7 +7509,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0057.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0057.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"399", + "code":"401", "des":"For details about how to create an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.If you connect to an RDS DB instance through a private network, ensure that the ECS and DB", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Create and Connect to an ECS?,Database Connection,User Guide", @@ -7491,7 +7530,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0020.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0020.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"400", + "code":"402", "des":"Perform the following steps to identify the problem:If they are in the same VPC, go to 2.If they are in different VPCs, create an ECS in the VPC in which the RDS DB insta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If an ECS Cannot Connect to an RDS DB Instance Through a Private Network?,Database ", @@ -7512,7 +7551,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0021.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0021.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"401", + "code":"403", "des":"Troubleshoot RDS connection failures caused by a client problem by checking the following items:ECS Security PolicyIn Windows, check whether the RDS instance port is enab", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If a Database Client Problem Causes a Connection Failure?,Database Connection,User ", @@ -7533,7 +7572,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0022.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0022.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"402", + "code":"404", "des":"Check whether any of the following problems occurred on the RDS DB instance.The RDS DB instance is not properly connected.Solution: Check the connection. If you connect t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If an RDS Database Problem Causes a Connection Failure?,Database Connection,User Gu", @@ -7554,7 +7593,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0023.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0023.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"403", + "code":"405", "des":"Ensure that the ECS in which your applications are located is in the same VPC as the RDS DB instance. If the ECS and the RDS DB instance are in different VPCs, modify the", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do My Applications Access an RDS DB Instance in a VPC?,Database Connection,User Guide", @@ -7575,7 +7614,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0024.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0024.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"404", + "code":"406", "des":"It is recommended that your applications support automatic reconnections to the database. After a database reboot, your applications will automatically reconnect to the d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Do Applications Need to Support Reconnecting to the RDS DB Instance Automatically?,Database Connecti", @@ -7596,7 +7635,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0050.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0050.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"405", + "code":"407", "des":"Although the SSL certificate is optional if you choose to connect to a database through Java database connectivity (JDBC), download an SSL certificate to encrypt the conn", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Connect to a PostgreSQL Database Through JDBC?,Database Connection,User Guide", @@ -7617,7 +7656,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0100.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0100.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"406", + "code":"408", "des":"Check whether the ECS can connect to the RDS DB instance.If the ECS cannot connect to the RDS DB instance, check whether the ECS and RDS DB instance are located in the sa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If an RDS Microsoft SQL Server DB Instance Failed to Be Connected?,Database Connect", @@ -7638,7 +7677,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0101.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0101.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"407", + "code":"409", "des":"By default, RDS DB instances cannot be accessed over an intranet across regions. Cloud services in different regions cannot communicate with each other over an intranet. ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Access an RDS DB Instance Over an Intranet Connection Across Regions?,Database Connection,User", @@ -7659,7 +7698,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0111.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0111.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"408", + "code":"410", "des":"For DB instances connected using SSL, a primary/standby switchover or failover does not interrupt the connection because the SSL certificate is still valid for both the p", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Is an SSL Connection to a DB Instance Interrupted After a Primary/Standby Switchover or Failover?,Da", @@ -7680,7 +7719,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0070.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0070.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"409", + "code":"411", "des":"MySQL supports SSL connections. Different from other vendors, RDS for MySQL enables the SSL connection on the database server by default. When you use a client to connect", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does MySQL Support SSL Connections?,Database Connection,User Guide", @@ -7701,7 +7740,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0034.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0034.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"410", + "code":"412", "des":"You may have restored from a backup before you reset the administrator password.Check whether the DB instance was restored after you reset the administrator password.Log ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Did the New Password Not Take Effect After I Reset the Administrator Password?,Database Connecti", @@ -7722,7 +7761,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0155.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0155.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"411", + "code":"413", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Migration", @@ -7743,7 +7782,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0026.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0026.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"412", + "code":"414", "des":"The mysqldump or pg_dump tool is easy to use for data migration. However, when you use this tool, the server is stopped for a long period of time during data migration. O", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Do I Need to Use the mysqldump or pg_dump Tools for Migration?,Database Migration,User Guide", @@ -7764,7 +7803,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0025.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0025.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"413", + "code":"415", "des":"Exporting or importing data between DB engines of the same type is called homogeneous database export or import.Exporting or importing data between DB engines of differen", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Types of DB Engines Does RDS Support for Importing Data?,Database Migration,User Guide", @@ -7785,7 +7824,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0154.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0154.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"414", + "code":"416", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Permission", @@ -7806,7 +7845,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0075.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0075.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"415", + "code":"417", "des":"Most relational database cloud service platforms do not provide super permissions for the root user. The super permissions allow users to execute many management commands", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Does the Root User Not Have the Super Permissions?,Database Permission,User Guide", @@ -7827,7 +7866,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0144.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0144.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"416", + "code":"418", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Storage", @@ -7848,7 +7887,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0041.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0041.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"417", + "code":"419", "des":"The database storage engine is a core service for storing, processing, and protecting data. It can be used to control access permissions and rapidly process transactions ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Storage Engines Does the RDS for MySQL Support?,Database Storage,User Guide", @@ -7869,7 +7908,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0045.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0045.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"418", + "code":"420", "des":"RDS uses Elastic Volume Service (EVS) disks for storage. For details about EVS disks, see Elastic Volume Service Product Introduction.The RDS backup data is stored in OBS", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Is the RDS DB Instance Storage Configuration?,Database Storage,User Guide", @@ -7890,7 +7929,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0076.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0076.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"419", + "code":"421", "des":"No. After an RDS DB instance is created, the storage type cannot be changed.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Change the Storage Type of an RDS DB Instance from Common I/O to Ultra-high I/O?,Database Stor", @@ -7911,7 +7950,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0046.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0046.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"420", + "code":"422", "des":"There is not enough storage available for an RDS DB instance and the DB instance has entered read-only status, or applications can no longer read from or write to the dat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If My Data Exceeds the Available Storage of an RDS DB Instance?,Database Storage,Us", @@ -7932,7 +7971,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0152.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0152.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"421", + "code":"423", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Client Installation", @@ -7953,7 +7992,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0027.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0027.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"422", + "code":"424", "des":"MySQL provides client installation packages for different OSs on its official website. MySQL 8.0 is used as an example. You can download the latest version or any other v", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Install the MySQL Client?,Client Installation,User Guide", @@ -7974,7 +8013,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0029.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0029.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"423", + "code":"425", "des":"The PostgreSQL community provides client installation methods for different OSs. You can download and install the client using the installation tool of the OS. This insta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Install the PostgreSQL Client?,Client Installation,User Guide", @@ -7995,7 +8034,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0032.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0032.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"424", + "code":"426", "des":"The Microsoft SQL Server official website provides the SQL Server Management Studio installation package. SQL Server Management Studio applications can run in the Windows", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Install SQL Server Management Studio?,Client Installation,User Guide", @@ -8016,7 +8055,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0098.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0098.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"425", + "code":"427", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup and Restoration", @@ -8037,7 +8076,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0043.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0043.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"426", + "code":"428", "des":"Automated backup data is kept based on the backup retention period you specified. There is no limit for the manual backup retention period. You can delete manual backups ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Long Does RDS Store Backup Data For?,Backup and Restoration,User Guide", @@ -8058,7 +8097,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0044.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0044.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"427", + "code":"429", "des":"A backup window is a user-specified time during which RDS DB instances are backed up. With these periodic data backups, RDS allows you to restore DB instances to the back", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can My Database Be Used in the Backup Window?,Backup and Restoration,User Guide", @@ -8079,7 +8118,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0042.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0042.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"428", + "code":"430", "des":"You can back up data to an ECS the same way you export SQL statements. The ECS service does not have restrictions on the types of data to be backed up as long as the data", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Back Up an RDS Database to an ECS?,Backup and Restoration,User Guide", @@ -8100,7 +8139,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0053.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0053.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"429", + "code":"431", "des":"Automated backups may fail for the following reasons:The network environment is unstable due to issues such as network delay or interruption. RDS will detect these proble", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Has My Automated Backup Failed?,Backup and Restoration,User Guide", @@ -8121,7 +8160,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0014.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0014.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"430", + "code":"432", "des":"When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups are also deleted but its manual backups are retained.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Happens to Database Backups After an RDS DB Instance Is Deleted?,Backup and Restoration,User Gu", @@ -8142,7 +8181,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0015.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0015.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"431", + "code":"433", "des":"If your cloud account is deleted, both your automated and manual backups are deleted.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Will My Backups Be Deleted If I Delete My Cloud Account?,Backup and Restoration,User Guide", @@ -8163,7 +8202,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0012.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0012.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"432", + "code":"434", "des":"RDS does not delete or perform any operations on any user data. If this problem occurs, check if there have been any misoperations and restore the data from backup files,", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Is a Table or Data Missing from My Database?,Backup and Restoration,User Guide", @@ -8184,7 +8223,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0151.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0151.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"433", + "code":"435", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Monitoring", @@ -8205,7 +8244,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0036.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0036.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"434", + "code":"436", "des":"You need to pay attention to CPU, memory, and storage space usage.You can configure the system to report alarms based on service requirements and take measures to handle ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Which DB Instance Monitoring Metrics Do I Need to Pay Attention To?,Database Monitoring,User Guide", @@ -8226,7 +8265,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0150.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0150.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"435", + "code":"437", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Capacity Expansion and Specification Change", @@ -8247,7 +8286,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0016.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0016.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"436", + "code":"438", "des":"Currently, you can scale up storage space and change the CPU or memory of a DB instance.When storage space is being scaled up, RDS DB instances are still available and se", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Are My RDS DB Instances Available When Scaling?,Capacity Expansion and Specification Change,User Gui", @@ -8268,7 +8307,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0035.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0035.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"437", + "code":"439", "des":"The DB instance is in Faulty state after the original database port is changed.The DB instance cannot be connected using the new database port.The submitted database port", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Does the DB Instance Become Faulty After the Original Database Port Is Changed?,Capacity Expansi", @@ -8289,7 +8328,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0142.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0142.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"438", + "code":"440", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Parameter Modification", @@ -8310,7 +8349,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0031.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0031.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"439", + "code":"441", "des":"In the following cases, inappropriate parameter settings cause the database to be unavailable:Parameter value ranges are related to DB instance specifications.The maximum", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Inappropriate Parameter Settings Cause Unavailability of the PostgreSQL Database?,Database Para", @@ -8331,8 +8370,8 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0119.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0119.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"440", - "des":"PostgreSQL 12 support test_decoding. For more information about test_decoding, see test_decoding introduction.To use test_decoding, set wal_level to logical.", + "code":"442", + "des":"PostgreSQL 12 supports test_decoding. For more information about test_decoding, see test_decoding introduction.To use test_decoding, set wal_level to logical.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does RDS for PostgreSQL Support the test_decoding Plugin?,Database Parameter Modification,User Guide", "search_title":"", @@ -8352,7 +8391,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0092.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0092.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"441", + "code":"443", "des":"When you add NDF files of the custom database and the tempdb database, do not place them in the C drive. If you place them in the C drive, the system disk space will be u", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Where Should I Store the NDF Files for Microsoft SQL Server?,Database Parameter Modification,User Gu", @@ -8373,7 +8412,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0149.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0149.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"442", + "code":"444", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Log Management", @@ -8394,7 +8433,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0078.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0078.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"443", + "code":"445", "des":"Generally, the delay is 5 minutes. If the size of slow query logs reaches 10 MB within 5 minutes, the logs will be uploaded to OBS.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Long Is the Delay for RDS MySQL Slow Query Logs?,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -8415,7 +8454,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0077.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0077.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"444", + "code":"446", "des":"The slow query threshold is 5 seconds.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What's the Slow Query Threshold for Microsoft SQL Server?,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -8436,7 +8475,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0059.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0059.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"445", + "code":"447", "des":"EXECUTE master.dbo.rds_read_errorlogFileID,LogType,FilterText,FilterBeginTime,FilterEndTimeFileID: indicates the ID of an error log. The value 0 indicates the latest logs", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Obtain Microsoft SQL Server Error Logs Using Commands?,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -8457,7 +8496,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0120.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0120.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"446", + "code":"448", "des":"Sorry, statistics on RDS slow query logs cannot be exported.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can I Export Statistics on RDS Slow Query Logs?,Log Management,User Guide", @@ -8478,7 +8517,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0143.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0143.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"447", + "code":"449", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Network Security", @@ -8499,7 +8538,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0038.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0038.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"448", + "code":"450", "des":"RDS runs your DB instances in a VPC, ensuring that the DB instances are isolated from other services.RDS uses security groups to ensure that only trusted sources can acce", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Security Protection Policies Does RDS Have?,Network Security,User Guide", @@ -8520,7 +8559,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0040.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0040.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"449", + "code":"451", "des":"The VPC security group helps ensure the security of RDS in a VPC. In addition, an ACL can be used to allow or reject I/O network traffic for each subnet.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Ensure the Security of RDS DB Instances in a VPC?,Network Security,User Guide", @@ -8541,7 +8580,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0039.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0039.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"450", + "code":"452", "des":"When you access RDS through an EIP, service data will be transmitted on the public network. To prevent any potential data breaches, you are advised to use SSL to encrypt ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can Data Security Be Ensured During Transmission When I Access RDS Through an EIP?,Network Secur", @@ -8562,7 +8601,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0056.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0056.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"451", + "code":"453", "des":"If you enable public accessibility, your EIP DNS and database port may be vulnerable to hacking. To protect information such as your EIP, DNS, database port, database acc", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Prevent Untrusted Source IP Addresses from Accessing RDS?,Network Security,User Guide", @@ -8583,7 +8622,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0054.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0054.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"452", + "code":"454", "des":"When you attempt to connect to a DB instance through a private network, check whether the ECS and RDS DB instance are in the same security group.If the ECS and RDS DB ins", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Configure a Security Group to Enable Access to RDS DB Instances?,Network Security,User Guid", @@ -8604,7 +8643,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0052.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0052.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"453", + "code":"455", "des":"Click Start and choose Run. In the displayed Run dialog box, enter MMC and press Enter.On the displayed console, choose File > Add/Remove Snap-in.In the left Available sn", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Import the Root Certificate to a Windows or Linux OS?,Network Security,User Guide", @@ -8625,7 +8664,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0051.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0051.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"454", + "code":"456", "des":"When you connect to an RDS MySQL DB instance using an SSL connection, run the following command to check whether the certificate has expired:Update the root certificate t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Identify the Validity Period of an SSL Root Certificate?,Network Security,User Guide", @@ -8646,7 +8685,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0011.html", "node_id":"rds_faq_0011.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"455", + "code":"457", "des":"Data tamperingLots of security measures are provided to ensure that only authenticated users have permissions to perform operations on database table records. Database ta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Identify Data Corruption?,Network Security,User Guide", @@ -8667,7 +8706,7 @@ "uri":"rds_history_0008.html", "node_id":"rds_history_0008.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"456", + "code":"458", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Change History,User Guide", @@ -8688,7 +8727,7 @@ "uri":"rds_glossary_0001.html", "node_id":"rds_glossary_0001.xml", "product_code":"rds", - "code":"457", + "code":"459", "des":"For details about the glossaries in this document, see Glossary.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Glossary,User Guide", diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/CLASS.TXT.json b/docs/rds/umn/CLASS.TXT.json index c4223b6c9..ff0f30901 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/CLASS.TXT.json +++ b/docs/rds/umn/CLASS.TXT.json @@ -125,6 +125,15 @@ "p_code":"12", "code":"14" }, + { + "desc":"The database system is generally an important part of an IT system and has high requirements on storage I/O performance. You can select a storage type based on service de", + "product_code":"rds", + "title":"DB Instance Storage Types", + "uri":"rds_01_0020.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"12", + "code":"15" + }, { "desc":"Table 1 lists the DB engines and versions supported by RDS.For new applications, you are advised to use the latest major version of the DB engine, for example, MySQL 8.0.", "product_code":"rds", @@ -132,7 +141,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"12", - "code":"15" + "code":"16" }, { "desc":"The status of a DB instance indicates the health of the DB instance. You can use the management console or API to view the status of a DB instance.", @@ -141,7 +150,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"12", - "code":"16" + "code":"17" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -150,7 +159,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"17" + "code":"18" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL, RDS for PostgreSQL, RDS for SQL Server 2022 Enterprise Edition, 2019 Enterprise Edition, and 2017 Enterprise Edition DB instances support read replicas to ", @@ -158,8 +167,8 @@ "title":"Read/Write Splitting", "uri":"rds_01_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"17", - "code":"18" + "p_code":"18", + "code":"19" }, { "desc":"RDS supports diverse storage extension through Distributed Cache Service (DCS) for Memcached, DCS for Redis, and OBS.", @@ -167,8 +176,8 @@ "title":"Diversified Data Storage", "uri":"rds_01_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"17", - "code":"19" + "p_code":"18", + "code":"20" }, { "desc":"If you need to assign different permissions to employees in your enterprise to access your RDS resources, Identity and Access Management (IAM) is a good choice for fine-g", @@ -177,7 +186,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"20" + "code":"21" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -186,7 +195,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"21" + "code":"22" }, { "desc":"Table 1 shows the constraints designed to ensure the stability and security of RDS for MySQL.", @@ -194,8 +203,8 @@ "title":"MySQL Constraints", "uri":"rds_02_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"22" + "p_code":"22", + "code":"23" }, { "desc":"Table 1 shows the constraints designed to ensure the stability and security of RDS for PostgreSQL.", @@ -203,8 +212,8 @@ "title":"PostgreSQL Constraints", "uri":"rds_02_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"23" + "p_code":"22", + "code":"24" }, { "desc":"RDS for SQL Server only supports DB instances under the License Included model and does not support \"bring your own license\" (BYOL). After a DB instance is created, it co", @@ -212,8 +221,8 @@ "title":"Microsoft SQL Server Constraints", "uri":"rds_03_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"21", - "code":"24" + "p_code":"22", + "code":"25" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -222,7 +231,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"25" + "code":"26" }, { "desc":"This section describes function differences between single and primary/standby DB instances as well as function differences among Microsoft SQL Server editions.For detail", @@ -230,8 +239,8 @@ "title":"Function Differences of RDS for SQL Server Instances Types and Editions", "uri":"rds_01_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"25", - "code":"26" + "p_code":"26", + "code":"27" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -240,7 +249,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"27" + "code":"28" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -249,7 +258,7 @@ "uri":"rds_01_0088.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"28" + "code":"29" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL extends the lifecycle of MySQL Community Edition. New versions are released during the extended period only to fix issues that severely affect the security ", @@ -257,8 +266,8 @@ "title":"RDS for MySQL Versioning Policy", "uri":"rds_01_0087.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"28", - "code":"29" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"30" }, { "desc":"The PostgreSQL community releases a new major version containing new features about once a year. Each major version receives bug fixes and, if need be, security fixes tha", @@ -266,8 +275,8 @@ "title":"RDS for PostgreSQL Versioning Policy", "uri":"rds_01_0089.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"28", - "code":"30" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"31" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -276,7 +285,7 @@ "uri":"index.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"31" + "code":"32" }, { "desc":"You can create and connect to DB instances on the RDS console.", @@ -284,8 +293,8 @@ "title":"Operation Guide", "uri":"rds_02_0119.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"31", - "code":"32" + "p_code":"32", + "code":"33" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to create a DB instance on the management console.The DB instance class and storage space you need depend on your processing power and memory r", @@ -293,8 +302,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_02_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"31", - "code":"33" + "p_code":"32", + "code":"34" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -302,8 +311,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_02_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"31", - "code":"34" + "p_code":"32", + "code":"35" }, { "desc":"An RDS DB instance can be connected through a private network or a public network.VPC: indicates the Virtual Private Cloud.ECS: indicates the Elastic Cloud Server.If the ", @@ -311,8 +320,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_02_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"34", - "code":"35" + "p_code":"35", + "code":"36" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -320,8 +329,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Private Network", "uri":"rds_02_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"34", - "code":"36" + "p_code":"35", + "code":"37" }, { "desc":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a MySQL DB instance through a private network.", @@ -329,8 +338,8 @@ "title":"Overview", "uri":"en-us_topic_apply_for_rds.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"36", - "code":"37" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"38" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -338,8 +347,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Security Group Rules", "uri":"rds_02_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"36", - "code":"38" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"39" }, { "desc":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.You have logged in to an ECS.To co", @@ -347,8 +356,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Private Network", "uri":"rds_02_0047.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"36", - "code":"39" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"40" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -356,8 +365,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to an RDS for MySQL DB Instance Through a Public Network", "uri":"rds_02_0048.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"34", - "code":"40" + "p_code":"35", + "code":"41" }, { "desc":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a MySQL DB instance through a public network.", @@ -365,8 +374,8 @@ "title":"Overview", "uri":"rds_02_0099.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"41" + "p_code":"41", + "code":"42" }, { "desc":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility and can un", @@ -374,8 +383,8 @@ "title":"Binding an EIP", "uri":"rds_02_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"42" + "p_code":"41", + "code":"43" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -383,8 +392,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Security Group Rules", "uri":"rds_02_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"43" + "p_code":"41", + "code":"44" }, { "desc":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.An EIP has been bound to the targe", @@ -392,8 +401,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Public Network", "uri":"en-us_topic_connect_instance.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"44" + "p_code":"41", + "code":"45" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -402,7 +411,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0063.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"45" + "code":"46" }, { "desc":"You can create and connect to DB instances on the RDS console.", @@ -410,8 +419,8 @@ "title":"Operation Guide", "uri":"rds_02_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"45", - "code":"46" + "p_code":"46", + "code":"47" }, { "desc":"You can create DB instances using the RDS console or APIs. For details about how to create DB instances using APIs, see \"Creating a DB Instance\" in the Relational Databas", @@ -419,8 +428,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_03_0065.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"45", - "code":"47" + "p_code":"46", + "code":"48" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -428,8 +437,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_02_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"45", - "code":"48" + "p_code":"46", + "code":"49" }, { "desc":"An RDS DB instance can be connected through a private network or a public network.VPC: indicates the Virtual Private Cloud.ECS: indicates the Elastic Cloud Server.If the ", @@ -437,8 +446,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_03_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"49" + "p_code":"49", + "code":"50" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -446,8 +455,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Private Network", "uri":"rds_02_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"50" + "p_code":"49", + "code":"51" }, { "desc":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a PostgreSQL DB instance through a private network.", @@ -455,8 +464,8 @@ "title":"Overview", "uri":"rds_02_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"50", - "code":"51" + "p_code":"51", + "code":"52" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -464,8 +473,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Security Group Rules", "uri":"rds_02_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"50", - "code":"52" + "p_code":"51", + "code":"53" }, { "desc":"You can use the PostgreSQL client psql to connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection is encrypted and therefore more s", @@ -473,8 +482,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through psql", "uri":"rds_02_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"50", - "code":"53" + "p_code":"51", + "code":"54" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -482,8 +491,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a PostgreSQL DB Instance Through a Public Network", "uri":"rds_02_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"54" + "p_code":"49", + "code":"55" }, { "desc":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a PostgreSQL DB instance through a public network.", @@ -491,8 +500,8 @@ "title":"Overview", "uri":"rds_02_0019.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"54", - "code":"55" + "p_code":"55", + "code":"56" }, { "desc":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility and can un", @@ -500,8 +509,8 @@ "title":"Binding an EIP", "uri":"rds_03_0064.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"54", - "code":"56" + "p_code":"55", + "code":"57" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -509,8 +518,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Security Group Rules", "uri":"rds_02_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"54", - "code":"57" + "p_code":"55", + "code":"58" }, { "desc":"You can use the PostgreSQL client psql to connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection is encrypted and therefore more s", @@ -518,8 +527,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through psql", "uri":"rds_02_0051.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"54", - "code":"58" + "p_code":"55", + "code":"59" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -528,7 +537,7 @@ "uri":"rds_03_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"59" + "code":"60" }, { "desc":"You can create and connect to DB instances on the RDS console.", @@ -536,8 +545,8 @@ "title":"Operation Guide", "uri":"rds_03_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"60" + "p_code":"60", + "code":"61" }, { "desc":"You can create DB instances using the RDS console or APIs. For details about how to create DB instances using APIs, see the \"Creating a DB Instance\" section in the Relati", @@ -545,8 +554,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_04_0061.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"61" + "p_code":"60", + "code":"62" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -554,8 +563,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Connect to a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_04_0062.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"62" + "p_code":"60", + "code":"63" }, { "desc":"An RDS DB instance can be connected through a private network or a public network.VPC: indicates the Virtual Private Cloud.ECS: indicates the Elastic Cloud Server.If the ", @@ -563,8 +572,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_04_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"62", - "code":"63" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"64" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -572,8 +581,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Private Network", "uri":"rds_03_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"62", - "code":"64" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"65" }, { "desc":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server DB instance through a private network.", @@ -581,8 +590,8 @@ "title":"Overview", "uri":"rds_03_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"64", - "code":"65" + "p_code":"65", + "code":"66" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -590,8 +599,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Security Group Rules", "uri":"rds_03_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"64", - "code":"66" + "p_code":"65", + "code":"67" }, { "desc":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.Prepare an ECS.To connect to a DB ", @@ -599,8 +608,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Private Network", "uri":"rds_03_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"64", - "code":"67" + "p_code":"65", + "code":"68" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -608,8 +617,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a SQL Server DB Instance Through a Public Network", "uri":"rds_03_0052.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"62", - "code":"68" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"69" }, { "desc":"Figure 1 illustrates the process of connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server DB instance through a public network.", @@ -617,8 +626,8 @@ "title":"Overview", "uri":"rds_03_0066.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"68", - "code":"69" + "p_code":"69", + "code":"70" }, { "desc":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility and can un", @@ -626,8 +635,8 @@ "title":"Binding an EIP", "uri":"rds_03_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"68", - "code":"70" + "p_code":"69", + "code":"71" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -635,8 +644,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Security Group Rules", "uri":"rds_03_0051.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"68", - "code":"71" + "p_code":"69", + "code":"72" }, { "desc":"You can connect to a DB instance through a non-SSL connection or an SSL connection. The SSL connection encrypts data and is more secure.Install the Microsoft SQL Server c", @@ -644,8 +653,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through a Public Network", "uri":"rds_03_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"68", - "code":"72" + "p_code":"69", + "code":"73" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -654,7 +663,7 @@ "uri":"rds_08_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"73" + "code":"74" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -662,8 +671,8 @@ "title":"Data Migration", "uri":"rds_05_0001_02.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"74" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"75" }, { "desc":"You can access RDS DB instances through an EIP or through an ECS.Prepare an ECS for accessing DB instances in the same VPC or prepare a device for accessing RDS through a", @@ -671,8 +680,8 @@ "title":"Migrating Data to RDS for MySQL Using mysqldump", "uri":"rds_migration_mysql.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"74", - "code":"75" + "p_code":"75", + "code":"76" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -680,8 +689,8 @@ "title":"Parameter Tuning", "uri":"rds_08_00000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"76" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"77" }, { "desc":"Parameters are key configuration items in a database system. Improper parameter settings may adversely affect the stable running of databases. This section describes some", @@ -689,8 +698,8 @@ "title":"Suggestions on MySQL Parameter Tuning", "uri":"rds_08_00001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"77" + "p_code":"77", + "code":"78" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -698,8 +707,8 @@ "title":"Permissions Management", "uri":"rds_07_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"78" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"79" }, { "desc":"This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users ", @@ -707,8 +716,8 @@ "title":"Creating a User and Granting Permissions", "uri":"rds_07_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"78", - "code":"79" + "p_code":"79", + "code":"80" }, { "desc":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system policies of RDS.You can create custom policies in either of the following two ways:Visual editor: Select cloud ser", @@ -716,8 +725,8 @@ "title":"RDS Custom Policies", "uri":"rds_07_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"78", - "code":"80" + "p_code":"79", + "code":"81" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -725,8 +734,8 @@ "title":"Instance Lifecycle", "uri":"rds_05_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"81" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"82" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to quickly create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one.You can create DB instances with the same configurations numer", @@ -734,8 +743,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Same DB Instance as an Existing DB Instance", "uri":"rds_05_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"82" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"83" }, { "desc":"If you use DB instances only for routine development, you can temporarily stop instances to save money. You can stop a DB instance for up to seven days.If you stop a prim", @@ -743,8 +752,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_05_0057.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"83" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"84" }, { "desc":"You can stop your DB instance temporarily to save money. After stopping your DB instance, you can restart it to begin using it again.If you start a primary DB instance, r", @@ -752,8 +761,8 @@ "title":"Starting a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_05_0058.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"84" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"85" }, { "desc":"You may need to reboot a DB instance during maintenance. For example, after modifying some parameters, a reboot is required for the modifications to take effect. You can ", @@ -761,8 +770,8 @@ "title":"Rebooting DB Instances or Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_08_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"85" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"86" }, { "desc":"You can customize which instance items are displayed on the Instances page.The following items are displayed by default: DB instance name/ID, DB instance type, DB engine ", @@ -770,8 +779,8 @@ "title":"Selecting Displayed Items", "uri":"rds_08_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"86" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"87" }, { "desc":"You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.", @@ -779,8 +788,8 @@ "title":"Exporting DB Instance Information", "uri":"rds_05_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"87" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"88" }, { "desc":"To release resources, you can delete DB instances or read replicas as required on the Instances page.DB instances cannot be deleted when operations are being performed on", @@ -788,8 +797,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a DB Instance or Read Replica", "uri":"rds_08_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"88" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"89" }, { "desc":"Deleted DB instances can be moved to the recycle bin. You can rebuild DB instances from the recycle bin. The DB engine, DB engine version, and storage type of the new DB ", @@ -797,8 +806,8 @@ "title":"Recycling a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_mysql_recycle.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"89" + "p_code":"82", + "code":"90" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -806,8 +815,8 @@ "title":"Instance Modifications", "uri":"rds_05_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"90" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"91" }, { "desc":"On the Overview page, you can get knowledge of the overall status of your RDS for MySQL instance, including alarms, intelligent anomaly diagnosis, and key performance met", @@ -815,8 +824,8 @@ "title":"Introduction to Instance Overview", "uri":"rds_08_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"91" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"92" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL supports minor version upgrades to improve performance, add new functions, and fix bugs.The upgrade will cause the DB instance to reboot and interrupt servi", @@ -824,8 +833,8 @@ "title":"Upgrading a Minor Version", "uri":"rds_05_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"92" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"93" }, { "desc":"You can change the name of a primary DB instance or read replica.Alternatively, click the target DB instance to go to the Overview page. Under DB Instance Name, click to", @@ -833,8 +842,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Name", "uri":"rds_modify_instance_name.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"93" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"94" }, { "desc":"You can configure the failover priority for reliability or for availability, depending on your service requirements.Reliability: This option is selected by default. Data ", @@ -842,8 +851,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Failover Priority", "uri":"rds_modify_availability.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"94" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"95" }, { "desc":"You can change the instance class (CPU or memory) of a DB instance as required. If the status of a DB instance changes from Changing instance class to Available, the chan", @@ -851,8 +860,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Class", "uri":"en-us_topic_scale_rds.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"95" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"96" }, { "desc":"If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.You are advised to set alarm rules for the storage space u", @@ -860,8 +869,8 @@ "title":"Scaling up Storage Space", "uri":"en-us_topic_scale_cluster.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"96" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"97" }, { "desc":"With storage autoscaling enabled, when RDS detects that you are running out of database space, it automatically scales up your storage.Autoscaling up the storage of a rea", @@ -869,8 +878,8 @@ "title":"Storage Autoscaling", "uri":"rds_05_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"97" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"98" }, { "desc":"If the storage type of your RDS DB instance does not match your workloads, you can change it as needed.Alternatively, click the instance name to go to the Overview page. ", @@ -878,8 +887,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Storage Type", "uri":"rds_05_0140.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"98" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"99" }, { "desc":"The maintenance window is 02:00–06:00 by default and you can change it as required. To prevent service interruptions, you are advised to set the maintenance window to off", @@ -887,8 +896,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Maintenance Window", "uri":"rds_05_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"99" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"100" }, { "desc":"RDS enables you to change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances to improve instance reliability. This operation does not affect the services running on the ", @@ -896,8 +905,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Type from Single to Primary/Standby", "uri":"rds_05_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"100" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"101" }, { "desc":"If you choose to create primary/standby DB instances, RDS will create a primary DB instance and a synchronous standby DB instance in the same region. You can access the p", @@ -905,8 +914,8 @@ "title":"Manually Switching Between Primary and Standby DB Instances", "uri":"rds_switch_ha.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"101" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"102" }, { "desc":"You can migrate a standby DB instance to another AZ in the same region as the original AZ.Primary/standby instances running MySQL 5.7, or 8.0 support standby instance mig", @@ -914,8 +923,8 @@ "title":"Migrating a Standby DB Instance", "uri":"rds_05_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"90", - "code":"102" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"103" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -923,8 +932,8 @@ "title":"Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_11_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"103" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"104" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL supports read replicas.In read-intensive scenarios, a single DB instance may be unable to handle the read pressure and service performance may be affected. ", @@ -932,8 +941,8 @@ "title":"Introducing Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_11_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"104" + "p_code":"104", + "code":"105" }, { "desc":"Read replicas are used to enhance the read capabilities and reduce the load on primary DB instances.After DB instances are created, you can create read replicas for them.", @@ -941,8 +950,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Read Replica", "uri":"en-us_topic_add_read_replica.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"105" + "p_code":"104", + "code":"106" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -950,8 +959,8 @@ "title":"Managing a Read Replica", "uri":"rds_11_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"106" + "p_code":"104", + "code":"107" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -959,8 +968,8 @@ "title":"Backups and Restorations", "uri":"rds_05_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"107" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"108" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL automatically creates backups for DB instances during the backup time window. The backups are stored based on a preset retention period (1 to 732 days).A ba", @@ -968,8 +977,8 @@ "title":"Introduction to Backups", "uri":"rds_08_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"108" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"109" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL supports multiple backup types. Based on different dimensions, there are the following backup types:", @@ -977,8 +986,8 @@ "title":"Backup Types", "uri":"en-us_topic_backup_restore.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"109" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"110" }, { "desc":"When you create a DB instance, an automated backup policy is enabled by default. For security purposes, the automated backup policy cannot be disabled. After the DB insta", @@ -986,8 +995,8 @@ "title":"Configuring an Intra-Region Backup Policy", "uri":"rds_08_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"110" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"111" }, { "desc":"RDS allows you to create manual backups of a running primary DB instance. You can use these backups to restore data.When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups a", @@ -995,8 +1004,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Manual Backup", "uri":"rds_08_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"111" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"112" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to download a manual or an automated backup file to a local device and restore data from the backup file.RDS for MySQL enables you to download ", @@ -1004,8 +1013,8 @@ "title":"Downloading a Backup File", "uri":"rds_08_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"112" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"113" }, { "desc":"RDS for MySQL allows you to download binlog backup files to your client computer and use them to restore DB instances if necessary.You can also select the binlog backups ", @@ -1013,8 +1022,8 @@ "title":"Downloading a Binlog Backup File", "uri":"rds_03_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"113" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"114" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created. The restoration is at the DB instance ", @@ -1022,8 +1031,8 @@ "title":"Restoring from Backup Files to DB Instances", "uri":"rds_08_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"114" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"115" }, { "desc":"You can download backup files by referring to Downloading a Backup File and restore data from them.Backup data cannot be restored to local databases that run the Windows ", @@ -1031,8 +1040,8 @@ "title":"Restoring from Backup Files to a Self-Built MySQL Database", "uri":"rds_08_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"115" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"116" }, { "desc":"You can restore from automated backups to a specified point in time.RDS for MySQL supports restoration to a new, the original, or an existing DB instance.When you enter t", @@ -1040,8 +1049,8 @@ "title":"Restoring a DB Instance to a Point in Time", "uri":"rds_08_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"116" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"117" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to replicate a manual or an automated backup. The new backup name must be different from the original backup name.You can replicate backups and", @@ -1049,8 +1058,8 @@ "title":"Replicating a Backup", "uri":"rds_08_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"117" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"118" }, { "desc":"You can delete manual backups to free up backup storage.Deleted manual backups cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.The following backups ", @@ -1058,8 +1067,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Manual Backup", "uri":"rds_08_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"118" + "p_code":"108", + "code":"119" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1067,8 +1076,8 @@ "title":"Parameter Template Management", "uri":"rds_08_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"119" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"120" }, { "desc":"You can use database parameter templates to manage the DB engine configuration. A database parameter template acts as a container for engine configuration values that can", @@ -1076,8 +1085,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Parameter Template", "uri":"en-us_topic_parameter_group.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"120" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"121" }, { "desc":"You can modify parameters in a custom parameter template to optimize RDS database performance.You can only change parameter values in custom parameter templates. You cann", @@ -1085,8 +1094,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Parameters", "uri":"rds_configuration.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"121" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"122" }, { "desc":"RDS allows you to import new parameter templates for future use. To apply an imported parameter template to new DB instances, see Applying a Parameter Template.Only param", @@ -1094,8 +1103,8 @@ "title":"Importing a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_08_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"122" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"123" }, { "desc":"You can export a parameter template of a DB instance for future use. You can also apply the exported parameter template to DB instances by referring to Applying a Paramet", @@ -1103,8 +1112,8 @@ "title":"Exporting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_08_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"123" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"124" }, { "desc":"You can compare DB instance parameters with a parameter template that uses the same DB engine to understand the differences of parameter settings.You can also compare def", @@ -1112,8 +1121,8 @@ "title":"Comparing Parameter Templates", "uri":"rds_08_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"124" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"125" }, { "desc":"You can view the change history of DB instance parameters or custom parameter templates.An exported or custom parameter template has initially a blank change history.You ", @@ -1121,8 +1130,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Parameter Change History", "uri":"rds_05_0099.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"125" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"126" }, { "desc":"You can replicate a parameter template you have created. When you have already created a parameter template and want to include most of the custom parameters and values f", @@ -1130,8 +1139,8 @@ "title":"Replicating a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_08_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"126" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"127" }, { "desc":"You can reset all parameters in a custom parameter template to their default settings.If the DB instance status is Parameter change. Pending reboot, a reboot is required ", @@ -1139,8 +1148,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_08_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"127" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"128" }, { "desc":"You can apply parameter templates to DB instances as needed.The parameter innodb_buffer_pool_size is determined by the memory. DB instances of different specifications ha", @@ -1148,8 +1157,8 @@ "title":"Applying a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_05_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"128" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"129" }, { "desc":"You can view the application records of a parameter template.You can view the name or ID of the DB instance that the parameter template applies to, as well as the applica", @@ -1157,8 +1166,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Application Records of a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_05_0098.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"129" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"130" }, { "desc":"You can modify the description of a parameter template you have created.You cannot modify the description of a default parameter template.The description consists of a ma", @@ -1166,8 +1175,8 @@ "title":"Modifying a Parameter Template Description", "uri":"rds_08_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"130" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"131" }, { "desc":"You can delete a custom parameter template that is no longer in use.Deleted parameter templates cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.Defau", @@ -1175,8 +1184,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_08_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"131" + "p_code":"120", + "code":"132" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1184,8 +1193,8 @@ "title":"Connection Management", "uri":"rds_05_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"132" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"133" }, { "desc":"You can change floating IP addresses after migrating on-premises databases or other cloud databases to RDS.After a floating IP address is changed, the domain name needs t", @@ -1193,8 +1202,8 @@ "title":"Configuring and Changing a Floating IP Address", "uri":"rds_05_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"132", - "code":"133" + "p_code":"133", + "code":"134" }, { "desc":"You can connect to RDS DB instances through private domain names.Changing the private domain name will interrupt your database connection. To reconnect to the instance, c", @@ -1202,8 +1211,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Private Domain Name", "uri":"rds_05_0085.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"132", - "code":"134" + "p_code":"133", + "code":"135" }, { "desc":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility, and you c", @@ -1211,8 +1220,8 @@ "title":"Binding and Unbinding an EIP", "uri":"rds_public_accessibility.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"132", - "code":"135" + "p_code":"133", + "code":"136" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the database port of the pri", @@ -1220,8 +1229,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Database Port", "uri":"rds_change_database_port.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"132", - "code":"136" + "p_code":"133", + "code":"137" }, { "desc":"A security group is a collection of access control rules for ECSs and RDS DB instances that have the same security protection requirements and are mutually trusted in a V", @@ -1229,8 +1238,8 @@ "title":"Configuring a Security Group Rule", "uri":"rds_11_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"132", - "code":"137" + "p_code":"133", + "code":"138" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1238,8 +1247,8 @@ "title":"Database Proxy (Read/Write Splitting)", "uri":"rds_11_0050.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"138" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"139" }, { "desc":"Read/write splitting enables read and write requests to be automatically routed through a read/write splitting address. You can enable read/write splitting after read rep", @@ -1247,8 +1256,8 @@ "title":"Introducing Read/Write Splitting", "uri":"rds_11_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"139" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"140" }, { "desc":"The following table describes the updates in each kernel version of RDS for MySQL database proxy.", @@ -1256,8 +1265,8 @@ "title":"Kernel Versions", "uri":"rds_11_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"140" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"141" }, { "desc":"In most cases, an RDS for MySQL proxy instance sends all requests in transactions to the primary DB instance to ensure transaction correctness. However, in some framework", @@ -1265,26 +1274,26 @@ "title":"Configuring Transaction Splitting", "uri":"rds_11_0047.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"141" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"142" }, { - "desc":"Read/write splitting enables read and write requests to be automatically routed through a read/write splitting address. This section describes how to enable read/write sp", + "desc":"You can enable database proxy for your RDS for MySQL instance to automatically forward read and write requests through a proxy address. To reduce read pressure of the pri", "product_code":"rds", "title":"Enabling Read/Write Splitting", "uri":"rds_11_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"142" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"143" }, { - "desc":"After read/write splitting is enabled, you can configure the delay threshold and routing policy as required.The system automatically distributes weights to read replicas,", + "desc":"After database proxy is enabled and read replicas are created, you can configure the delay threshold and routing policy as required.The system automatically distributes w", "product_code":"rds", "title":"Configuring the Delay Threshold and Routing Policy", "uri":"rds_11_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"143" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"144" }, { "desc":"After read/write splitting is enabled, you can change the read/write splitting address.Changing the read/write splitting address will interrupt database connections and s", @@ -1292,8 +1301,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Read/Write Splitting Address", "uri":"rds_11_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"144" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"145" }, { "desc":"After a database proxy is created, you can apply for a private domain name for it and change the domain name later as needed.The private domain name must be unique in a g", @@ -1301,8 +1310,8 @@ "title":"Applying for and Changing a Private Domain Name for a Database Proxy", "uri":"rds_11_0066.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"145" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"146" }, { "desc":"You can change the instance class (vCPU or memory) of a DB proxy instance as required. If the DB instance status changes from Changing proxy instance class to Available, ", @@ -1310,8 +1319,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Instance Class of a DB Proxy Instance", "uri":"rds_11_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"146" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"147" }, { "desc":"After read/write splitting is enabled, you can change the number of proxy nodes as required.Read/write splitting has been enabled.The primary DB instance, read replicas, ", @@ -1319,8 +1328,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Number of Proxy Nodes", "uri":"rds_11_0045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"147" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"148" }, { "desc":"You can manually upgrade the RDS for MySQL database proxy to the latest kernel version to improve performance, add new functions, and fix problems.For details about kerne", @@ -1328,8 +1337,8 @@ "title":"Upgrading the Kernel Version of Database Proxy", "uri":"rds_11_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"148" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"149" }, { "desc":"If load balancing is enabled for a database proxy instance, the security group associated with the proxy instance does not apply. You need to use access control to grant ", @@ -1337,8 +1346,8 @@ "title":"Enabling or Disabling Access Control", "uri":"rds_11_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"149" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"150" }, { "desc":"You can disable read/write splitting as required.If the database proxy is disabled, read/write splitting is also disabled and services using the read/write splitting addr", @@ -1346,8 +1355,8 @@ "title":"Disabling Read/Write Splitting", "uri":"rds_11_0019.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"150" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"151" }, { "desc":"This section describes the rules of distributing read weights to DB instances of different specifications.When the system automatically sets the read weights for DB insta", @@ -1355,8 +1364,8 @@ "title":"Rules for Distributing Weights", "uri":"rds_11_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"151" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"152" }, { "desc":"After read/write splitting is enabled, databases can be connected through a read/write splitting address. You can use internal SQL commands to verify the read/write split", @@ -1364,8 +1373,8 @@ "title":"Testing Read/Write Splitting Performance", "uri":"rds_11_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"138", - "code":"152" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"153" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1373,8 +1382,8 @@ "title":"Problem Diagnosis and SQL Analysis", "uri":"rds_22_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"153" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"154" }, { "desc":"DBA Assistant provides visualized database O&M and intelligent diagnosis for developers and database administrators (DBAs), making database O&M easy and efficient. By ana", @@ -1382,8 +1391,8 @@ "title":"Function Overview", "uri":"rds_08_0037.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"153", - "code":"154" + "p_code":"154", + "code":"155" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1391,8 +1400,8 @@ "title":"Performance Monitoring", "uri":"rds_10_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"153", - "code":"155" + "p_code":"154", + "code":"156" }, { "desc":"DBA Assistant allows you to view the performance metrics of your DB instance. Historical trends of performance metrics within a specified time period help you learn about", @@ -1400,8 +1409,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Performance Metrics of a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_08_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"155", - "code":"156" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"157" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1409,8 +1418,8 @@ "title":"Problem Diagnosis", "uri":"rds_10_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"153", - "code":"157" + "p_code":"154", + "code":"158" }, { "desc":"You can view current session statistics of your instance, identify abnormal sessions, and kill the sessions.Viewing session statisticsIn the sessions statistics, you can ", @@ -1418,8 +1427,8 @@ "title":"Managing Real-Time Sessions", "uri":"rds_08_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"157", - "code":"158" + "p_code":"158", + "code":"159" }, { "desc":"Data and log storage space and its changes significantly impact database performance. RDS for MySQL shows you the distribution and changes of used storage on the Storage ", @@ -1427,8 +1436,8 @@ "title":"Managing Storage Capacity", "uri":"rds_08_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"157", - "code":"159" + "p_code":"158", + "code":"160" }, { "desc":"DBA Assistant allows you to check whether your DB instance has metadata locks and InnoDB locks. You can also check the recent deadlock analysis and full deadlock analysis", @@ -1436,8 +1445,8 @@ "title":"Managing Locks & Transactions", "uri":"rds_08_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"157", - "code":"160" + "p_code":"158", + "code":"161" }, { "desc":"This function is used to analyze and discover large transactions and the transactions that have been there for a long time without being committed in the database.Data on", @@ -1445,8 +1454,8 @@ "title":"Managing Historical Transactions", "uri":"rds_08_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"157", - "code":"161" + "p_code":"158", + "code":"162" }, { "desc":"You can start a diagnosis for your DB instance and subscribe to diagnosis reports.Starting a Diagnosis: You can perform an overall health diagnosis on your instance and v", @@ -1454,8 +1463,8 @@ "title":"Daily Reports", "uri":"rds_08_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"157", - "code":"162" + "p_code":"158", + "code":"163" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1463,8 +1472,8 @@ "title":"SQL Analysis", "uri":"rds_10_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"153", - "code":"163" + "p_code":"154", + "code":"164" }, { "desc":"Slow Query Log displays a chart of SQL statements that are taking too long to execute and allows you to sort slow SQL statements by multiple dimensions, such as by user, ", @@ -1472,17 +1481,17 @@ "title":"Viewing Slow Query Logs of a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_08_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"163", - "code":"164" + "p_code":"164", + "code":"165" }, { - "desc":"Top SQL shows the SQL queries that have been contribued at most to database load. You can sort them by multiple dimensions.Top SQL needs to be purchased separately. To us", + "desc":"Top SQL shows the SQL queries that have been contributed at most to database load. You can sort them by multiple dimensions.Top SQL needs to be purchased separately. To u", "product_code":"rds", "title":"Viewing Top SQL Statements of a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_08_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"163", - "code":"165" + "p_code":"164", + "code":"166" }, { "desc":"SQL Insights allows you to not only query all executed SQL statements, but also analyze and search for the tables that are accessed and updated most frequently, and the S", @@ -1490,8 +1499,8 @@ "title":"Creating a SQL Insights Task", "uri":"rds_08_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"163", - "code":"166" + "p_code":"164", + "code":"167" }, { "desc":"You can create rules to control concurrent execution of SQL statements by specifying SQL type, keywords, and maximum concurrency. To maintain better performance at high c", @@ -1499,8 +1508,8 @@ "title":"Creating a SQL Throttling Rule", "uri":"rds_08_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"163", - "code":"167" + "p_code":"164", + "code":"168" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1508,8 +1517,8 @@ "title":"Data Security", "uri":"rds_05_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"168" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"169" }, { "desc":"You can reset the administrator password of a primary instance.You can also reset the password of your database account when using RDS.If you have changed the administrat", @@ -1517,8 +1526,8 @@ "title":"Resetting the Administrator Password", "uri":"rds_reset_password.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"168", - "code":"169" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"170" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change the security group of a primary DB instance or read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the security group of the pri", @@ -1526,8 +1535,17 @@ "title":"Changing a Security Group", "uri":"rds_08_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"168", - "code":"170" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"171" + }, + { + "desc":"Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an encryption-based Internet security protocol for establishing an encrypted link between a server and a client. It provides authenticated In", + "product_code":"rds", + "title":"Configuring an SSL Connection", + "uri":"rds_mysql_0001.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"169", + "code":"172" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1535,8 +1553,8 @@ "title":"Metrics and Alarms", "uri":"rds_08_0019.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"171" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"173" }, { "desc":"The RDS Agent monitors RDS DB instances and collects monitoring metrics only.This section describes the RDS metrics that can be monitored by Cloud Eye as well as their na", @@ -1544,8 +1562,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Displayed Metrics", "uri":"rds_06_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"171", - "code":"172" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"174" }, { "desc":"You can set alarm rules by referring to Setting Alarm Rules to customize the monitored objects and notification policies and keep track of the RDS running status.The RDS ", @@ -1553,8 +1571,8 @@ "title":"Setting Alarm Rules", "uri":"rds_06_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"171", - "code":"173" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"175" }, { "desc":"Cloud Eye monitors the statuses of RDS DB instances. You can view RDS monitoring metrics on the management console.Monitored data takes some time before it can be display", @@ -1562,8 +1580,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Monitoring Metrics", "uri":"rds_06_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"171", - "code":"174" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"176" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1571,8 +1589,8 @@ "title":"Interconnection with CTS", "uri":"rds_08_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"175" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"177" }, { "desc":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations related to RDS for further query, audit, and backtrack.", @@ -1580,8 +1598,8 @@ "title":"Key Operations Supported by CTS", "uri":"rds_06_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"175", - "code":"176" + "p_code":"177", + "code":"178" }, { "desc":"After CTS is enabled, operations on cloud resources are recorded. You can view the operation records of the last 7 days on the CTS console.This section describes how to q", @@ -1589,8 +1607,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Tracing Events", "uri":"rds_06_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"175", - "code":"177" + "p_code":"177", + "code":"179" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1598,8 +1616,8 @@ "title":"Log Management", "uri":"rds_08_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"178" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"180" }, { "desc":"RDS log management allows you to view database-level logs, including error logs and slow SQL query logs.Error logs contain warning- and error-level logs generated during ", @@ -1607,8 +1625,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Error Logs", "uri":"rds_mysql_error_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"178", - "code":"179" + "p_code":"180", + "code":"181" }, { "desc":"Slow query logs record statements that exceed long_query_time. You can use these logs to identify and optimize the statements that are executing slowly.RDS supports the f", @@ -1616,8 +1634,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Slow Query Logs", "uri":"rds_mysql_slow_query_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"178", - "code":"180" + "p_code":"180", + "code":"182" }, { "desc":"You can view failover or switchover logs of MySQL DB instances to evaluate the impact on services.Only failover and switchover logs within 30 days are displayed.", @@ -1625,8 +1643,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Failover/Switchover Logs", "uri":"rds_switch_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"178", - "code":"181" + "p_code":"180", + "code":"183" }, { "desc":"After you enable the SQL audit function, all SQL operations will be recorded in log files. You can download audit logs to view log details.By default, SQL audit is disabl", @@ -1634,8 +1652,8 @@ "title":"Enabling the SQL Audit Function", "uri":"rds_sql_auditing_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"178", - "code":"182" + "p_code":"180", + "code":"184" }, { "desc":"If you enable the SQL audit function, all SQL operations will be logged, and you can download audit logs to view details. By default, the SQL audit function is disabled. ", @@ -1643,8 +1661,8 @@ "title":"Downloading SQL Audit Logs", "uri":"rds_download_sql_auditing_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"178", - "code":"183" + "p_code":"180", + "code":"185" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1652,8 +1670,8 @@ "title":"Task Center", "uri":"rds_05_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"184" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"186" }, { "desc":"You can view the progress and results of scheduled and instant tasks on the Task Center page.RDS allows you to view and manage the following instant tasks:Creating DB ins", @@ -1661,8 +1679,8 @@ "title":"Viewing a Task", "uri":"rds_task_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"184", - "code":"185" + "p_code":"186", + "code":"187" }, { "desc":"You can delete task records so that they are no longer displayed in the task list. This operation only deletes the task records, and does not delete the DB instances or t", @@ -1670,8 +1688,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Task Record", "uri":"rds_task_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"184", - "code":"186" + "p_code":"186", + "code":"188" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -1679,8 +1697,8 @@ "title":"Managing Tags", "uri":"rds_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"73", - "code":"187" + "p_code":"74", + "code":"189" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1689,7 +1707,7 @@ "uri":"rds_09_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"188" + "code":"190" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1697,8 +1715,8 @@ "title":"Data Migration", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0001_02.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"189" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"191" }, { "desc":"PostgreSQL supports logical backups. You can use the pg_dump logical backup function to export backup files and then import them to RDS using psql.You can access RDS DB i", @@ -1706,8 +1724,8 @@ "title":"Migrating Data to RDS for PostgreSQL Using psql", "uri":"rds_09_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"189", - "code":"190" + "p_code":"191", + "code":"192" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1715,8 +1733,8 @@ "title":"Parameter Tuning", "uri":"rds_pg_10_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"191" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"193" }, { "desc":"Parameters are key configuration items in a database system. Improper parameter settings may adversely affect the stable running of databases. This section describes some", @@ -1724,8 +1742,8 @@ "title":"Suggestions on PostgreSQL Parameter Tuning", "uri":"rds_pg_10_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"191", - "code":"192" + "p_code":"193", + "code":"194" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1733,8 +1751,8 @@ "title":"Permissions Management", "uri":"rds_pg_07_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"193" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"195" }, { "desc":"This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users ", @@ -1742,8 +1760,8 @@ "title":"Creating a User and Granting Permissions", "uri":"rds_pg_07_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"193", - "code":"194" + "p_code":"195", + "code":"196" }, { "desc":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system policies of RDS.You can create custom policies in either of the following two ways:Visual editor: Select cloud ser", @@ -1751,8 +1769,8 @@ "title":"RDS Custom Policies", "uri":"rds_pg_07_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"193", - "code":"195" + "p_code":"195", + "code":"197" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1760,8 +1778,8 @@ "title":"Instance Lifecycle", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"196" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"198" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to quickly create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one.You can create DB instances with the same configurations numer", @@ -1769,8 +1787,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Same DB Instance as an Existing DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"197" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"199" }, { "desc":"If you use DB instances only for routine development, you can temporarily stop instances to save money. You can stop an instance for up to seven days.If you stop a primar", @@ -1778,8 +1796,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_stop.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"198" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"200" }, { "desc":"You can stop your instance temporarily to save money. After stopping your instance, you can restart it to begin using it again.If you start a primary instance, read repli", @@ -1787,8 +1805,8 @@ "title":"Starting a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_start.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"199" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"201" }, { "desc":"You may need to reboot a DB instance during maintenance. For example, after modifying some parameters, a reboot is required for the modifications to take effect. You can ", @@ -1796,8 +1814,8 @@ "title":"Rebooting DB Instances or Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_09_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"200" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"202" }, { "desc":"You can customize which instance items are displayed on the Instances page.The following items are displayed by default: DB instance name/ID, DB instance type, DB engine ", @@ -1805,8 +1823,8 @@ "title":"Selecting Displayed Items", "uri":"rds_pg_06_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"201" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"203" }, { "desc":"You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.", @@ -1814,8 +1832,8 @@ "title":"Exporting DB Instance Information", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"202" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"204" }, { "desc":"To release resources, you can delete DB instances or read replicas as required on the Instances page.DB instances cannot be deleted when operations are being performed on", @@ -1823,8 +1841,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a DB Instance or Read Replica", "uri":"rds_09_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"203" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"205" }, { "desc":"Deleted DB instances can be moved to the recycle bin. You can rebuild DB instances from the recycle bin. The DB engine, DB engine version, and storage type of the new DB ", @@ -1832,8 +1850,8 @@ "title":"Recycling a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_recycle.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"196", - "code":"204" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"206" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1841,8 +1859,8 @@ "title":"Instance Modifications", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"205" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"207" }, { "desc":"On the Overview page, you can get knowledge of the overall status of your RDS for PostgreSQL instance, including alarms, intelligent anomaly diagnosis, and key performanc", @@ -1850,8 +1868,8 @@ "title":"Introduction to Instance Overview", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"206" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"208" }, { "desc":"RDS for PostgreSQL supports minor version upgrades to improve performance, add new functions, and fix bugs.When any new minor version is released to address vulnerabiliti", @@ -1859,8 +1877,8 @@ "title":"Upgrading a Minor Version", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"207" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"209" }, { "desc":"You can change the name of a primary DB instance or read replica.Alternatively, click the target DB instance to go to the Overview page. Under DB Instance Name, click to", @@ -1868,8 +1886,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Name", "uri":"rds_pg_modify_instance_name.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"208" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"210" }, { "desc":"You can configure the failover priority for reliability or for availability, depending on your service requirements.Reliability: This option is selected by default. Data ", @@ -1877,8 +1895,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Failover Priority", "uri":"rds_pg_modify_availability.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"209" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"211" }, { "desc":"You can change the instance class (CPU or memory) of a DB instance as required. If the status of a DB instance changes from Changing instance class to Available, the chan", @@ -1886,8 +1904,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Class", "uri":"rds_pg_scale_rds.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"210" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"212" }, { "desc":"If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.You are advised to set alarm rules for the storage space u", @@ -1895,8 +1913,8 @@ "title":"Scaling up Storage Space", "uri":"rds_pg_scale_cluster.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"211" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"213" }, { "desc":"If the storage type of your RDS DB instance does not match your workloads, you can change it as needed.If the storage type of a read replica is different from that of its", @@ -1904,8 +1922,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Storage Type", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0084.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"212" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"214" }, { "desc":"With storage autoscaling enabled, when RDS detects that you are running out of database space, it automatically scales up your storage.Autoscaling up the storage space of", @@ -1913,8 +1931,8 @@ "title":"Storage Autoscaling", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"213" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"215" }, { "desc":"The maintenance window is 02:00–06:00 by default and you can change it as required. To prevent service interruptions, you are advised to set the maintenance window to off", @@ -1922,8 +1940,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Maintenance Window", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"214" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"216" }, { "desc":"RDS enables you to change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances to improve instance reliability.Primary/standby DB instances support automatic failover. If ", @@ -1931,8 +1949,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Type from Single to Primary/Standby", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"215" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"217" }, { "desc":"If you choose to create primary/standby DB instances, RDS will create a primary DB instance and a synchronous standby DB instance in the same region. You can access the p", @@ -1940,8 +1958,8 @@ "title":"Manually Switching Between Primary and Standby DB Instances", "uri":"rds_pg_switch_ha.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"216" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"218" }, { "desc":"You can migrate a standby DB instance to another AZ in the same region as the original AZ.DDL operations and scheduled events will be suspended during migration. To preve", @@ -1949,8 +1967,8 @@ "title":"Migrating a Standby DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"205", - "code":"217" + "p_code":"207", + "code":"219" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1958,8 +1976,8 @@ "title":"Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"218" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"220" }, { "desc":"RDS for PostgreSQL supports read replicas.In read-intensive scenarios, a single DB instance may be unable to handle the read pressure and service performance may be affec", @@ -1967,8 +1985,8 @@ "title":"Introducing Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"218", - "code":"219" + "p_code":"220", + "code":"221" }, { "desc":"Read replicas are used to enhance the read capabilities and reduce the load on primary DB instances.You can create read replicas as needed.A maximum of five read replicas", @@ -1976,8 +1994,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Read Replica", "uri":"rds_add_read_replica_pg.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"218", - "code":"220" + "p_code":"220", + "code":"222" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1985,8 +2003,8 @@ "title":"Managing a Read Replica", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"218", - "code":"221" + "p_code":"220", + "code":"223" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1994,8 +2012,8 @@ "title":"Backups and Restorations", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"222" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"224" }, { "desc":"RDS supports backups and restorations to ensure data reliability.Automated backups are created during the backup time window for your DB instances. RDS saves automated ba", @@ -2003,8 +2021,8 @@ "title":"Working with Backups", "uri":"rds_pg_backup_restore.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"223" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"225" }, { "desc":"When you create a DB instance, an automated backup policy is enabled by default. For security purposes, the automated backup policy cannot be disabled. After the DB insta", @@ -2012,8 +2030,8 @@ "title":"Configuring an Automated Backup Policy", "uri":"rds_09_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"224" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"226" }, { "desc":"RDS allows you to create manual backups of a running primary DB instance. You can use these backups to restore data.When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups a", @@ -2021,8 +2039,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Manual Backup", "uri":"rds_09_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"225" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"227" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to download a manual or an automated backup file to a local device and restore data from the backup file.RDS for PostgreSQL enables you to down", @@ -2030,8 +2048,8 @@ "title":"Downloading a Full Backup File", "uri":"rds_09_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"226" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"228" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to download a manual or an automated backup file to a local device and restore data from the backup file.RDS for PostgreSQL enables you to down", @@ -2039,8 +2057,8 @@ "title":"Downloading an Incremental Backup File", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0138.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"227" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"229" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created. The restoration is at the DB instance ", @@ -2048,8 +2066,8 @@ "title":"Restoring from Backup Files to RDS for PostgreSQL", "uri":"rds_09_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"228" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"230" }, { "desc":"You can restore from automated backups to a specified point in time.RDS for PostgreSQL supports restoration to a new, the original, or an existing DB instance.When you en", @@ -2057,8 +2075,8 @@ "title":"Restoring a DB Instance to a Point in Time", "uri":"rds_09_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"229" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"231" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to replicate a manual or an automated backup. The new backup name must be different from the original backup name.You can replicate backups and", @@ -2066,8 +2084,8 @@ "title":"Replicating a Backup", "uri":"rds_09_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"230" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"232" }, { "desc":"You can delete manual backups to free up backup storage.Deleted manual backups cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.The following backups ", @@ -2075,8 +2093,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Manual Backup", "uri":"rds_09_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"222", - "code":"231" + "p_code":"224", + "code":"233" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2084,8 +2102,8 @@ "title":"Parameter Template Management", "uri":"rds_09_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"232" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"234" }, { "desc":"You can use database parameter templates to manage the DB engine configuration. A database parameter template acts as a container for engine configuration values that can", @@ -2093,8 +2111,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_pg_parameter_group.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"233" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"235" }, { "desc":"You can modify parameters in a custom parameter template to optimize RDS database performance.You can change parameter values in custom parameter templates only and canno", @@ -2102,8 +2120,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Instance Parameters", "uri":"rds_pg_configuration.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"234" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"236" }, { "desc":"You can export a parameter template of a DB instance for future use. You can also apply the exported parameter template to DB instances by referring to Applying a Paramet", @@ -2111,8 +2129,8 @@ "title":"Exporting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"235" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"237" }, { "desc":"You can compare DB instance parameters with a parameter template that uses the same DB engine to understand the differences of parameter settings.You can also compare def", @@ -2120,8 +2138,8 @@ "title":"Comparing Parameter Templates", "uri":"rds_09_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"236" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"238" }, { "desc":"You can view the change history of DB instance parameters or custom parameter templates.An exported or custom parameter template has initially a blank change history.You ", @@ -2129,8 +2147,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Parameter Change History", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0099.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"237" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"239" }, { "desc":"You can replicate a parameter template you have created. When you have already created a parameter template and want to include most of the custom parameters and values f", @@ -2138,8 +2156,8 @@ "title":"Replicating a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_09_0036.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"238" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"240" }, { "desc":"You can reset all parameters in a custom parameter template to their default settings.If the DB instance status is Parameter change. Pending reboot, a reboot is required ", @@ -2147,8 +2165,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_09_0037.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"239" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"241" }, { "desc":"You can apply parameter templates to DB instances as needed. A parameter template can be applied only to DB instances of the same version.If you intend to apply a default", @@ -2156,8 +2174,8 @@ "title":"Applying a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"240" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"242" }, { "desc":"You can view the application records of a parameter template.You can view the name or ID of the DB instance that the parameter template applies to, as well as the applica", @@ -2165,8 +2183,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Application Records of a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0098.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"241" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"243" }, { "desc":"You can modify the description of a parameter template you have created.You cannot modify the description of a default parameter template.The description consists of a ma", @@ -2174,8 +2192,8 @@ "title":"Modifying a Parameter Template Description", "uri":"rds_09_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"242" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"244" }, { "desc":"You can delete a custom parameter template that is no longer in use.Deleted parameter templates cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.Defau", @@ -2183,8 +2201,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_09_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"243" + "p_code":"234", + "code":"245" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2192,8 +2210,8 @@ "title":"Connection Management", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"244" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"246" }, { "desc":"You can change floating IP addresses after migrating on-premises databases or other cloud databases to RDS.After a floating IP address is changed, the domain name needs t", @@ -2201,8 +2219,8 @@ "title":"Configuring and Changing a Floating IP Address", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"245" + "p_code":"246", + "code":"247" }, { "desc":"You can change the private domain name of your DB instance and connect to the instance using the new domain name.Only the prefix of a private domain name can be modified.", @@ -2210,8 +2228,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Private Domain Name", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"246" + "p_code":"246", + "code":"248" }, { "desc":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility, and you c", @@ -2219,8 +2237,8 @@ "title":"Binding and Unbinding an EIP", "uri":"rds_pg_public_accessibility.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"247" + "p_code":"246", + "code":"249" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the database port of the pri", @@ -2228,8 +2246,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Database Port", "uri":"rds_pg_change_database_port.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"248" + "p_code":"246", + "code":"250" }, { "desc":"You can use the pgAdmin client to connect to an RDS DB instance.The pgAdmin version must be 4 or later.Prepare an ECS or a device that can access RDS DB instances.To conn", @@ -2237,8 +2255,8 @@ "title":"Connecting to a DB Instance Through pgAdmin", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"249" + "p_code":"246", + "code":"251" }, { "desc":"SSL is enabled by default when you create an RDS for PostgreSQL DB instance and cannot be disabled after the instance is created. SSL encryption ensures that all communic", @@ -2246,8 +2264,8 @@ "title":"Configuring SSL Encryption", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"250" + "p_code":"246", + "code":"252" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2255,8 +2273,8 @@ "title":"Plugin Management", "uri":"rds_09_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"251" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"253" }, { "desc":"RDS allows you to install and uninstall plugins on the console.RDS for PostgreSQL plugins only take effect on the databases you created the plugins for. To use a plugin o", @@ -2264,8 +2282,8 @@ "title":"Installing and Uninstalling a Plugin on the RDS Console", "uri":"rds_09_0070.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"252" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"254" }, { "desc":"RDS provides the PostgreSQL plugin management solution for user root. Except the following plugins, you need to manually create other plugins by referring to this section", @@ -2273,8 +2291,8 @@ "title":"Installing and Uninstalling a Plugin Using SQL Commands", "uri":"rds_09_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"253" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"255" }, { "desc":"The following table lists the plugins supported by the latest minor versions of RDS for PostgreSQL. You can use SELECT name FROM pg_available_extensions; to view the plug", @@ -2282,8 +2300,8 @@ "title":"Supported Plugins", "uri":"rds_09_0045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"254" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"256" }, { "desc":"RDS for PostgreSQL supports the pgvector plugin, which allows for vector data type and vector similarity search. This plugin supports:Exact and approximate nearest neighb", @@ -2291,8 +2309,8 @@ "title":"pgvector", "uri":"rds_09_0062.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"255" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"257" }, { "desc":"The pg_stat_statements extension provides a means for tracking planning and execution statistics of all SQL statements executed by a server.For more information, see pg_s", @@ -2300,8 +2318,8 @@ "title":"pg_stat_statements", "uri":"rds_09_0064.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"256" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"258" }, { "desc":"To prevent highly concurrent SQL statements that consume too many resources from causing instance instability, RDS for PostgreSQL provides rds_pg_sql_ccl, ccl is short fo", @@ -2309,8 +2327,8 @@ "title":"rds_pg_sql_ccl", "uri":"rds_09_0065.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"257" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"259" }, { "desc":"RDS provides the PostgreSQL tablespace management solution based on user root.# psql --host=--port= --dbname=--username=root -c\"select cont", @@ -2318,8 +2336,8 @@ "title":"Tablespace Management", "uri":"rds_09_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"258" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"260" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2327,8 +2345,8 @@ "title":"Problem Diagnosis and SQL Analysis", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"259" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"261" }, { "desc":"DBA Assistant provides visualized database O&M and intelligent diagnosis for developers and database administrators (DBAs), making database O&M easy and efficient. By ana", @@ -2336,8 +2354,8 @@ "title":"Function Overview", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0037.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"259", - "code":"260" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"262" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2345,8 +2363,8 @@ "title":"Performance Monitoring", "uri":"rds_pg_10_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"259", - "code":"261" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"263" }, { "desc":"DBA Assistant allows you to view the performance metrics of your DB instance. Historical trends of performance metrics within a specified time period help you learn about", @@ -2354,8 +2372,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Performance Metrics of a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"261", - "code":"262" + "p_code":"263", + "code":"264" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2363,8 +2381,8 @@ "title":"Problem Diagnosis", "uri":"rds_pg_10_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"259", - "code":"263" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"265" }, { "desc":"You can kill sessions when necessary on the Sessions that Can Be Killed If Necessary tab page. This page covers:Emergency Channel: If the maximum number of connections fo", @@ -2372,8 +2390,8 @@ "title":"Killing Sessions", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"263", - "code":"264" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"266" }, { "desc":"You can query session snapshots of your instance while sorting, filtering, and displaying the snapshots as needed. You can also view session statistics by user, source, a", @@ -2381,8 +2399,8 @@ "title":"Managing Real-Time Sessions", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"263", - "code":"265" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"267" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2390,8 +2408,8 @@ "title":"SQL Analysis", "uri":"rds_pg_10_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"259", - "code":"266" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"268" }, { "desc":"Slow Query Log displays a chart of SQL statements that are taking too long to execute and allows you to sort slow SQL statements by multiple dimensions, such as by user, ", @@ -2399,8 +2417,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Slow Query Logs of a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"266", - "code":"267" + "p_code":"268", + "code":"269" }, { "desc":"SQL Insights allows you to not only query all executed SQL statements, but also analyze and search for the tables that are accessed and updated most frequently, and the S", @@ -2408,8 +2426,8 @@ "title":"Creating a SQL Insights Task", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"266", - "code":"268" + "p_code":"268", + "code":"270" }, { "desc":"You can create rules to control concurrent execution of SQL statements by specifying original SQL statements or query ID. When the number of matched SQL statements exceed", @@ -2417,8 +2435,8 @@ "title":"Creating a SQL Throttling Rule", "uri":"rds_pg_08_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"266", - "code":"269" + "p_code":"268", + "code":"271" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2426,8 +2444,8 @@ "title":"Data Security", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"270" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"272" }, { "desc":"You can reset the administrator password of a primary instance.You can also reset the password of your database account when using RDS.If you have changed the administrat", @@ -2435,8 +2453,8 @@ "title":"Resetting the Administrator Password", "uri":"rds_pg_reset_password.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"270", - "code":"271" + "p_code":"272", + "code":"273" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change the security group of a primary DB instance or read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the security group of the pri", @@ -2444,8 +2462,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Security Group", "uri":"rds_09_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"270", - "code":"272" + "p_code":"272", + "code":"274" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2453,8 +2471,8 @@ "title":"Metrics and Alarms", "uri":"rds_09_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"273" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"275" }, { "desc":"The RDS Agent monitors RDS DB instances and collects monitoring metrics only.This section describes the metrics that can be monitored by Cloud Eye as well as their namesp", @@ -2462,8 +2480,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Displayed Metrics", "uri":"rds_pg_06_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"273", - "code":"274" + "p_code":"275", + "code":"276" }, { "desc":"You can set alarm rules by referring to Setting Alarm Rules to customize the monitored objects and notification policies and keep track of the RDS running status.The RDS ", @@ -2471,8 +2489,8 @@ "title":"Setting Alarm Rules", "uri":"rds_pg_06_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"273", - "code":"275" + "p_code":"275", + "code":"277" }, { "desc":"Cloud Eye monitors the statuses of RDS DB instances. You can view RDS monitoring metrics on the management console.Monitored data takes some time before it can be display", @@ -2480,8 +2498,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Monitoring Metrics", "uri":"rds_pg_06_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"273", - "code":"276" + "p_code":"275", + "code":"278" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2489,8 +2507,8 @@ "title":"Interconnection with CTS", "uri":"rds_09_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"277" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"279" }, { "desc":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations related to RDS for further query, audit, and backtrack.", @@ -2498,8 +2516,8 @@ "title":"Key Operations Supported by CTS", "uri":"rds_pg_06_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"277", - "code":"278" + "p_code":"279", + "code":"280" }, { "desc":"After CTS is enabled, operations on cloud resources are recorded. You can view the operation records of the last 7 days on the CTS console.This section describes how to q", @@ -2507,8 +2525,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Tracing Events", "uri":"rds_pg_06_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"277", - "code":"279" + "p_code":"279", + "code":"281" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2516,8 +2534,8 @@ "title":"Log Management", "uri":"rds_08_001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"280" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"282" }, { "desc":"Error logs contain logs generated during the database running. These can help you analyze problems with the database.You can select a log level in the upper right corner ", @@ -2525,8 +2543,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Error Logs", "uri":"rds_recent_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"280", - "code":"281" + "p_code":"282", + "code":"283" }, { "desc":"Slow query logs record statements that exceed the log_min_duration_statement value. You can view log details to identify statements that are slowly executed and optimize ", @@ -2534,8 +2552,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Slow Query Logs", "uri":"slow_query_log-pg.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"280", - "code":"282" + "p_code":"282", + "code":"284" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2543,8 +2561,8 @@ "title":"Task Center", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"283" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"285" }, { "desc":"You can view the detailed progress and result of the task on the Task Center page.You can view and manage the following tasks:Creating DB instancesCreating read replicasC", @@ -2552,8 +2570,8 @@ "title":"Viewing a Task", "uri":"rds_task_pg_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"283", - "code":"284" + "p_code":"285", + "code":"286" }, { "desc":"You can delete task records so that they are no longer displayed in the task list. This operation only deletes the task records, and does not delete the DB instances or t", @@ -2561,8 +2579,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Task Record", "uri":"rds_task_pg_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"283", - "code":"285" + "p_code":"285", + "code":"287" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2570,8 +2588,8 @@ "title":"Major Version Upgrade", "uri":"rds_09_0048.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"286" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"288" }, { "desc":"RDS for PostgreSQL allows you to upgrade the major version of your DB instance in either of the following methods:Upgrade without cutover: You can use it to test service ", @@ -2579,8 +2597,8 @@ "title":"Upgrading the Major Version of a DB Instance on the Console", "uri":"rds_pg_05_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"286", - "code":"287" + "p_code":"288", + "code":"289" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -2588,8 +2606,8 @@ "title":"Managing Tags", "uri":"rds_pg_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"188", - "code":"288" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"290" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2598,7 +2616,7 @@ "uri":"rds_10_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"289" + "code":"291" }, { "desc":"Do not use instances with 2 vCPUs and 4 GB memory for production workloads. Such instances are provided only for experience testing.Use instances with at least 4 vCPUs an", @@ -2606,8 +2624,8 @@ "title":"Suggestions on Using RDS for SQL Server", "uri":"rds_mssql_10_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"290" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"292" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2615,8 +2633,8 @@ "title":"Data Migration", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0001_02.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"291" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"293" }, { "desc":"You can access RDS DB instances through an EIP or ECS.Prepare an ECS for accessing DB instances in the same VPC or prepare a device for accessing RDS through an EIP. To c", @@ -2624,8 +2642,8 @@ "title":"Migrating Data to RDS for SQL Server Using SQL Server Management Studio", "uri":"rds_10_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"291", - "code":"292" + "p_code":"293", + "code":"294" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2633,8 +2651,8 @@ "title":"Permissions Management", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_07_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"293" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"295" }, { "desc":"This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:Create IAM users ", @@ -2642,8 +2660,8 @@ "title":"Creating a User and Granting Permissions", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_07_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"293", - "code":"294" + "p_code":"295", + "code":"296" }, { "desc":"Custom policies can be created to supplement the system policies of RDS.You can create custom policies in either of the following two ways:Visual editor: Select cloud ser", @@ -2651,8 +2669,8 @@ "title":"RDS Custom Policies", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_07_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"293", - "code":"295" + "p_code":"295", + "code":"297" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2660,8 +2678,8 @@ "title":"Instance Lifecycle", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"296" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"298" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to quickly create a DB instance with the same configurations as the selected one.You can create DB instances with the same configurations numer", @@ -2669,8 +2687,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Same DB Instance as an Existing DB Instance", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"297" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"299" }, { "desc":"You may need to reboot a DB instance during maintenance. For example, after modifying some parameters, a reboot is required for the modifications to take effect. You can ", @@ -2678,8 +2696,8 @@ "title":"Rebooting DB Instances or Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_11_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"298" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"300" }, { "desc":"If you use DB instances only for routine development, you can temporarily stop instances to save money. You can stop an instance for up to 15 days.After a DB instance is ", @@ -2687,8 +2705,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_mssql_stop.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"299" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"301" }, { "desc":"You can stop your instance temporarily to save money. After stopping your instance, you can restart it to begin using it again.After a DB instance is started, the VM wher", @@ -2696,8 +2714,8 @@ "title":"Starting a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_mssql_start.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"300" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"302" }, { "desc":"You can customize which instance items are displayed on the Instances page.The following items are displayed by default: DB instance name/ID, DB instance type, DB engine ", @@ -2705,8 +2723,8 @@ "title":"Selecting Displayed Items", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"301" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"303" }, { "desc":"You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.", @@ -2714,8 +2732,8 @@ "title":"Exporting DB Instance Information", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"302" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"304" }, { "desc":"To release resources, you can delete DB instances or read replicas as required on the Instances page.DB instances cannot be deleted when operations are being performed on", @@ -2723,8 +2741,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a DB Instance or Read Replica", "uri":"rds_11_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"303" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"305" }, { "desc":"Deleted DB instances can be moved to the recycle bin. You can rebuild DB instances from the recycle bin. The DB engine, DB engine version, and storage type of the new DB ", @@ -2732,8 +2750,8 @@ "title":"Recycling a DB Instance", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_recycle.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"296", - "code":"304" + "p_code":"298", + "code":"306" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2741,8 +2759,8 @@ "title":"Instance Modifications", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"305" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"307" }, { "desc":"On the Overview page, you can get knowledge of the overall status of your RDS for SQL Server instance, including alarms, intelligent anomaly diagnosis, and key performanc", @@ -2750,8 +2768,8 @@ "title":"Introduction to Instance Overview", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"306" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"308" }, { "desc":"You can change the name of a primary DB instance or read replica.Alternatively, click the target DB instance to go to the Overview page. Under DB Instance Name, click to", @@ -2759,8 +2777,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Name", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_modify_instance_name.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"307" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"309" }, { "desc":"You can configure the failover priority for reliability or for availability, depending on your service requirements.Reliability: This option is selected by default. Data ", @@ -2768,8 +2786,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Failover Priority", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_modify_availability.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"308" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"310" }, { "desc":"You can change the instance class (CPU or memory) of a DB instance as required. If the status of a DB instance changes from Changing instance class to Available, the chan", @@ -2777,8 +2795,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Class", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_scale_rds.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"309" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"311" }, { "desc":"If the storage type of your DB instance does not match your workloads, you can change it as needed.If the storage type of a read replica is different from that of its ass", @@ -2786,8 +2804,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Storage Type", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0050.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"310" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"312" }, { "desc":"If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.You are advised to set alarm rules for the storage space u", @@ -2795,8 +2813,8 @@ "title":"Scaling up Storage Space", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_scale_cluster.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"311" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"313" }, { "desc":"With storage autoscaling enabled, when RDS detects that you are running out of database space, it automatically scales up your storage.Autoscaling up the storage space of", @@ -2804,8 +2822,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Autoscaling", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"312" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"314" }, { "desc":"The maintenance window is 02:00–06:00 by default and you can change it as required. To prevent service interruptions, you are advised to set the maintenance window to off", @@ -2813,8 +2831,8 @@ "title":"Changing the Maintenance Window", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"313" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"315" }, { "desc":"RDS enables you to change single DB instances to primary/standby DB instances to improve instance reliability.Primary/standby DB instances support automatic failover. If ", @@ -2822,8 +2840,8 @@ "title":"Changing a DB Instance Type from Single to Primary/Standby", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"314" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"316" }, { "desc":"If you choose to create primary/standby DB instances, RDS will create a primary DB instance and a synchronous standby DB instance in the same region. You can access the p", @@ -2831,8 +2849,8 @@ "title":"Manually Switching Between Primary and Standby DB Instances", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_switch_ha.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"305", - "code":"315" + "p_code":"307", + "code":"317" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2840,8 +2858,8 @@ "title":"Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_11_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"316" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"318" }, { "desc":"Only RDS for SQL Server 2022 Enterprise Edition, 2019 Enterprise Edition and 2017 Enterprise Edition support read replicas.In read-intensive scenarios, a single DB instan", @@ -2849,8 +2867,8 @@ "title":"Introducing Read Replicas", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_11_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"316", - "code":"317" + "p_code":"318", + "code":"319" }, { "desc":"Read replicas are used to enhance the read capabilities and reduce the load on primary DB instances.After a DB instance has been created, you can create read replicas for", @@ -2858,8 +2876,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Read Replica", "uri":"rds_03_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"316", - "code":"318" + "p_code":"318", + "code":"320" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2867,8 +2885,8 @@ "title":"Managing a Read Replica", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_11_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"316", - "code":"319" + "p_code":"318", + "code":"321" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2876,8 +2894,8 @@ "title":"Backups and Restorations", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"320" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"322" }, { "desc":"RDS supports DB instance backups and restorations to ensure data reliability.Automated backups are created during the backup period of your DB instances. RDS saves automa", @@ -2885,8 +2903,8 @@ "title":"Working with Backups", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_backup_restore.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"321" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"323" }, { "desc":"When you create a DB instance, an automated backup policy is enabled by default. For security purposes, the automated backup policy cannot be disabled. After the DB insta", @@ -2894,8 +2912,8 @@ "title":"Configuring an Intra-Region Backup Policy", "uri":"rds_11_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"322" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"324" }, { "desc":"RDS allows you to create manual backups of a running primary DB instance. You can use these backups to restore data.When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups a", @@ -2903,8 +2921,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Manual Backup", "uri":"rds_11_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"323" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"325" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to download a manual backup or an automated backup to a local device and restore data from the backup file.If the size of the backup data is gr", @@ -2912,8 +2930,8 @@ "title":"Downloading a Backup File", "uri":"rds_11_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"324" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"326" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created.Alternatively, click the target DB inst", @@ -2921,8 +2939,8 @@ "title":"Restoring from Backup Files to RDS for SQL Server", "uri":"rds_11_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"325" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"327" }, { "desc":"You can download backup files by referring to section Downloading a Backup File and restore data from them. You can use SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS) to connect to ", @@ -2930,8 +2948,8 @@ "title":"Restoring from Backup Files to a Self-Built SQL Server Database", "uri":"rds_05_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"326" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"328" }, { "desc":"You can restore from automated backups to a specified point in time.RDS for Microsoft SQL Server supports restoration to a new, the original, or an existing DB instance.I", @@ -2939,8 +2957,8 @@ "title":"Restoring a DB Instance to a Point in Time", "uri":"rds_11_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"327" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"329" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to replicate a manual or an automated backup. The new backup name must be different from the original backup name.You can replicate backups and", @@ -2948,8 +2966,8 @@ "title":"Replicating a Backup", "uri":"rds_10_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"328" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"330" }, { "desc":"You can delete manual backups to free up backup storage.Deleted manual backups cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.The following backups ", @@ -2957,8 +2975,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Manual Backup", "uri":"rds_10_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"320", - "code":"329" + "p_code":"322", + "code":"331" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2966,8 +2984,8 @@ "title":"Parameter Template Management", "uri":"rds_10_0102.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"330" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"332" }, { "desc":"You can use database parameter templates to manage the DB engine configuration. A database parameter template acts as a container for engine configuration values that can", @@ -2975,8 +2993,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_parameter_group.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"331" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"333" }, { "desc":"You can modify parameters in a custom parameter template to optimize RDS database performance.You can only change parameter values in custom parameter templates. You cann", @@ -2984,8 +3002,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Parameters", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_configuration.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"332" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"334" }, { "desc":"You can export a parameter template of a DB instance for future use. You can also apply the exported parameter template to DB instances by referring to Applying a Paramet", @@ -2993,8 +3011,8 @@ "title":"Exporting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_08_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"333" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"335" }, { "desc":"You can compare DB instance parameters with a parameter template that uses the same DB engine to understand the differences of parameter settings.You can also compare def", @@ -3002,8 +3020,8 @@ "title":"Comparing Parameter Templates", "uri":"rds_10_0103.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"334" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"336" }, { "desc":"You can view the change history of DB instance parameters or custom parameter templates.An exported or custom parameter template has initially a blank change history.You ", @@ -3011,8 +3029,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Parameter Change History", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0099.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"335" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"337" }, { "desc":"You can replicate a parameter template you have created. When you have already created a parameter template and want to include most of the custom parameters and values f", @@ -3020,8 +3038,8 @@ "title":"Replicating a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_10_0104.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"336" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"338" }, { "desc":"You can reset all parameters in a custom parameter template to their default settings.If the DB instance status is Parameter change. Pending reboot, a reboot is required ", @@ -3029,8 +3047,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_10_0105.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"337" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"339" }, { "desc":"You can apply parameter templates to DB instances as needed. A parameter template can be applied only to DB instances of the same version.If you intend to apply a default", @@ -3038,8 +3056,8 @@ "title":"Applying a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"338" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"340" }, { "desc":"You can view the application records of a parameter template.You can view the name or ID of the DB instance that the parameter template applies to, as well as the applica", @@ -3047,8 +3065,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Application Records of a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0098.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"339" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"341" }, { "desc":"You can modify the description of a parameter template you have created.You cannot modify the description of a default parameter template.The description consists of a ma", @@ -3056,8 +3074,8 @@ "title":"Modifying a Parameter Template Description", "uri":"rds_10_0106.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"340" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"342" }, { "desc":"You can delete a custom parameter template that is no longer in use.Deleted parameter templates cannot be recovered. Exercise caution when performing this operation.Defau", @@ -3065,8 +3083,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Parameter Template", "uri":"rds_10_0107.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"330", - "code":"341" + "p_code":"332", + "code":"343" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3074,8 +3092,8 @@ "title":"Connection Management", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"342" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"344" }, { "desc":"You can change floating IP addresses after migrating on-premises databases or other cloud databases to RDS.After a floating IP address is changed, the domain name needs t", @@ -3083,8 +3101,8 @@ "title":"Configuring and Changing a Floating IP Address", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"342", - "code":"343" + "p_code":"344", + "code":"345" }, { "desc":"By default, a DB instance is not publicly accessible (not bound with an EIP) after being created. You can bind an EIP to a DB instance for public accessibility, and you c", @@ -3092,8 +3110,8 @@ "title":"Binding and Unbinding an EIP", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"342", - "code":"344" + "p_code":"344", + "code":"346" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change the database port of a primary DB instance or a read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the database port of the pri", @@ -3101,8 +3119,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Database Port", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_change_database_port.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"342", - "code":"345" + "p_code":"344", + "code":"347" }, { "desc":"You can apply for a private domain name and connect to your RDS DB instance through the private domain name.After a private domain name is generated, changing the floatin", @@ -3110,8 +3128,8 @@ "title":"Applying for and Changing a Private Domain Name", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"342", - "code":"346" + "p_code":"344", + "code":"348" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3119,8 +3137,8 @@ "title":"Data Security", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"347" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"349" }, { "desc":"You can reset the administrator password only through the primary DB instance.You can also reset the password of your database account when using RDS.If you have changed ", @@ -3128,8 +3146,8 @@ "title":"Resetting the Administrator Password", "uri":"en-us_topic_sqlserver_reset_password.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"347", - "code":"348" + "p_code":"349", + "code":"350" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change the security group of a primary DB instance or read replica. For primary/standby DB instances, changing the security group of the pri", @@ -3137,8 +3155,8 @@ "title":"Changing a Security Group", "uri":"rds_11_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"347", - "code":"349" + "p_code":"349", + "code":"351" }, { "desc":"Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) encrypts data files and backup files using certificates to implement real-time I/O encryption and decryption. This function effectively ", @@ -3146,8 +3164,8 @@ "title":"Configuring the TDE Function", "uri":"rds_11_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"347", - "code":"350" + "p_code":"349", + "code":"352" }, { "desc":"The participator, transaction-supported server, resource server, and transaction manager of a distributed transaction are deployed on different nodes in a distributed sys", @@ -3155,8 +3173,8 @@ "title":"Distributed Transactions", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_01_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"351" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"353" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3164,8 +3182,8 @@ "title":"Metrics and Alarms", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"352" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"354" }, { "desc":"The RDS Agent monitors RDS DB instances and collects monitoring metrics only.This section describes the metrics that can be monitored by Cloud Eye as well as their namesp", @@ -3173,8 +3191,8 @@ "title":"Configuring Displayed Metrics", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"352", - "code":"353" + "p_code":"354", + "code":"355" }, { "desc":"You can set alarm rules by referring to Setting Alarm Rules to customize the monitored objects and notification policies and keep track of the RDS running status.The RDS ", @@ -3182,8 +3200,8 @@ "title":"Setting Alarm Rules", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"352", - "code":"354" + "p_code":"354", + "code":"356" }, { "desc":"Cloud Eye monitors the statuses of RDS DB instances. You can view RDS monitoring metrics on the management console.Monitored data takes some time before it can be display", @@ -3191,8 +3209,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Monitoring Metrics", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"352", - "code":"355" + "p_code":"354", + "code":"357" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3200,8 +3218,8 @@ "title":"Interconnection with CTS", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_01_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"356" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"358" }, { "desc":"Cloud Trace Service (CTS) records operations related to RDS for further query, audit, and backtrack.", @@ -3209,8 +3227,8 @@ "title":"Key Operations Supported by CTS", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"356", - "code":"357" + "p_code":"358", + "code":"359" }, { "desc":"After CTS is enabled, operations on cloud resources are recorded. You can view the operation records of the last 7 days on the CTS console.This section describes how to q", @@ -3218,8 +3236,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Tracing Events", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_06_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"356", - "code":"358" + "p_code":"358", + "code":"360" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3227,8 +3245,8 @@ "title":"Log Management", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_log.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"359" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"361" }, { "desc":"System logs contain logs generated during the database running. These can help you analyze problems with the database.You can select a log level in the upper right corner", @@ -3236,8 +3254,8 @@ "title":"Viewing System Logs", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_01_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"359", - "code":"360" + "p_code":"361", + "code":"362" }, { "desc":"Slow query logs record statements that exceed long_query_time (1 second by default). You can view log details to identify statements that are executing slowly and optimiz", @@ -3245,8 +3263,8 @@ "title":"Viewing and Downloading Slow Query Logs", "uri":"slow_query_log-sqlserver.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"359", - "code":"361" + "p_code":"361", + "code":"363" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3254,8 +3272,8 @@ "title":"DBA Assistant", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_dba.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"362" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"364" }, { "desc":"DBA Assistant provides you with a range of database O&M functions, making it easy to diagnose database problems, locate faults, analyze and optimize database performance.", @@ -3263,8 +3281,8 @@ "title":"Function Overview", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_dba_01.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"362", - "code":"363" + "p_code":"364", + "code":"365" }, { "desc":"RDS for SQL Server provides space monitoring and analysis by instance, database, and even table, helping you quickly learn about space information and identify space prob", @@ -3272,8 +3290,8 @@ "title":"Storage Analysis", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_dba_02.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"362", - "code":"364" + "p_code":"364", + "code":"366" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3281,8 +3299,8 @@ "title":"Task Center", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_05_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"365" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"367" }, { "desc":"You can view the progress and results of tasks on the Task Center page.You can view and manage the following tasks:Creating DB instancesCreating read replicasChanging sin", @@ -3290,8 +3308,8 @@ "title":"Viewing a Task", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_task_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"365", - "code":"366" + "p_code":"367", + "code":"368" }, { "desc":"You can delete task records so that they are no longer displayed in the task list. This operation only deletes the task records, and does not delete the DB instances or t", @@ -3299,8 +3317,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Task Record", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_task_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"365", - "code":"367" + "p_code":"367", + "code":"369" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3308,8 +3326,8 @@ "title":"Usage of Stored Procedures", "uri":"rds_09_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"368" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"370" }, { "desc":"You can use a stored procedure to update statistics to improve query performance.An RDS Microsoft SQL Server DB instance has been connected. For details about how to conn", @@ -3317,8 +3335,8 @@ "title":"Updating Database Statistics", "uri":"rds_09_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"368", - "code":"369" + "p_code":"370", + "code":"371" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -3326,8 +3344,8 @@ "title":"Managing Tags", "uri":"rds_sqlserver_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"289", - "code":"370" + "p_code":"291", + "code":"372" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3336,7 +3354,7 @@ "uri":"rds_11_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"371" + "code":"373" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3344,8 +3362,8 @@ "title":"RDS for PostgreSQL", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"371", - "code":"372" + "p_code":"373", + "code":"374" }, { "desc":"PostgreSQL has earned a reputation for reliability, stability, and data consistency, and has become the preferred choice as an open-source relational database for many en", @@ -3353,8 +3371,8 @@ "title":"Security Best Practices", "uri":"rds_pg_11_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"372", - "code":"373" + "p_code":"374", + "code":"375" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3363,7 +3381,7 @@ "uri":"rds_faq_0000.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"374" + "code":"376" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3371,8 +3389,8 @@ "title":"Product Consulting", "uri":"rds_faq_0146.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"375" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"377" }, { "desc":"DB instance operating systems (OSs) are invisible to you. Your applications can access a database only through an IP address and a port.The backup files stored in Object ", @@ -3380,8 +3398,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Pay Attention to When Using RDS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"376" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"378" }, { "desc":"Calculation formula for RDS DB instance availability:DB instance availability = (1 – Failure duration/Total service duration) × 100%", @@ -3389,8 +3407,8 @@ "title":"What Is the Availability of RDS DB Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"377" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"379" }, { "desc":"Currently, DB instance cannot be created using a template.", @@ -3398,8 +3416,8 @@ "title":"Can I Use a Template to Create DB Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"378" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"380" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3407,8 +3425,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Differences Between RDS and Other Database Solutions?", "uri":"rds_faq_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"379" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"381" }, { "desc":"No. Your RDS DB instances and resources are isolated from other users' DB instances.", @@ -3416,8 +3434,8 @@ "title":"Will My RDS DB Instances Be Affected by Other User Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"380" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"382" }, { "desc":"Yes. RDS supports cross-AZ high availability. When you create primary/standby DB instances, you can select different AZs for them.", @@ -3425,8 +3443,8 @@ "title":"Does RDS Support Cross-AZ High Availability?", "uri":"rds_faq_0073.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"381" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"383" }, { "desc":"No. RDS single DB instances can be changed to primary/standby DB instances, but not the other way around.", @@ -3434,8 +3452,8 @@ "title":"Can RDS Primary/Standby DB Instances Be Changed to Single DB Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0104.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"382" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"384" }, { "desc":"The default code is utf8. You need to convert the default code to Unicode in the exported Excel file.", @@ -3443,8 +3461,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If Garbled Characters Are Displayed After SQL Query Results Are Exported to an Excel File?", "uri":"rds_faq_0110.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"383" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"385" }, { "desc":"To solve this problem:Check the performance of RDS DB instances on the RDS console.Compare the database connection status of local databases and RDS DB instances. This pr", @@ -3452,8 +3470,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do About Slow Respond of Websites When They Use RDS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"384" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"386" }, { "desc":"RDS provides the high availability. Select the primary/standby mode.Also called an unplanned handover. If the primary DB instance fails, the system will automatically swi", @@ -3461,8 +3479,8 @@ "title":"How Does a Cloud Database Perform a Primary/Standby Switchover?", "uri":"rds_faq_0065.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"385" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"387" }, { "desc":"Multiple ECSs can connect to the same RDS DB instance as long as the capability limits of a database are not exceeded.", @@ -3470,8 +3488,8 @@ "title":"Can Multiple ECSs Connect to the Same RDS DB Instance?", "uri":"rds_faq_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"386" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"388" }, { "desc":"An error shown in Figure 1 is reported on SQL Server Management Studio when a database is being deleted from RDS SQL Server primary/standby DB instances.The database 'xxx", @@ -3479,8 +3497,8 @@ "title":"Why Is an Error Reported When I Attempt to Delete a Database from RDS SQL Server Primary/Standby DB Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0094.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"375", - "code":"387" + "p_code":"377", + "code":"389" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3488,8 +3506,8 @@ "title":"Resource and Disk Management", "uri":"rds_faq_0145.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"388" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"390" }, { "desc":"The following logs and files occupy RDS storage space.If the original storage space is insufficient as your services grow, scale up storage space of your DB instance.If d", @@ -3497,8 +3515,8 @@ "title":"Which Types of Logs and Files Occupy RDS Storage Space?", "uri":"rds_faq_0049.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"388", - "code":"389" + "p_code":"390", + "code":"391" }, { "desc":"Both your common data (excluding backup data) and the data required for the operation of your DB instances (such as system database data, rollback logs, redo logs, and in", @@ -3506,8 +3524,8 @@ "title":"Which Items Occupy the Storage Space of My RDS DB Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0047.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"388", - "code":"390" + "p_code":"390", + "code":"392" }, { "desc":"The storage space you applied for will include space for the file system overhead required for inode, reserved block, and database operations.", @@ -3515,8 +3533,8 @@ "title":"What Overhead Does the Storage Space Have After I Applied for an RDS DB Instance?", "uri":"rds_faq_0048.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"388", - "code":"391" + "p_code":"390", + "code":"393" }, { "desc":"Data Definition Language (DDL) operations may increase storage space usage sharply. To ensure that services are running properly, do not perform DDL operations during pea", @@ -3524,8 +3542,8 @@ "title":"How Much Storage Space Is Required for DDL Operations?", "uri":"rds_faq_0082.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"388", - "code":"392" + "p_code":"390", + "code":"394" }, { "desc":"There are no limitations on the number of DB instances running on RDS.", @@ -3533,8 +3551,8 @@ "title":"How Many DB Instances Can Run on RDS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"388", - "code":"393" + "p_code":"390", + "code":"395" }, { "desc":"The maximum number of databases that can run on an RDS DB instance depends on the DB engine settings.If there are enough CPU, memory, and storage resources, there are no ", @@ -3542,8 +3560,8 @@ "title":"How Many Databases Can Run on an RDS DB Instance?", "uri":"rds_faq_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"388", - "code":"394" + "p_code":"390", + "code":"396" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3551,8 +3569,8 @@ "title":"Database Connection", "uri":"rds_faq_0141.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"395" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"397" }, { "desc":"For a DB instance that has an EIP bound, you can access it through the EIP.Enable a VPN in a VPC and use the VPN to connect to the RDS DB instance.Create an RDS and an EC", @@ -3560,8 +3578,8 @@ "title":"Can an External Server Access the RDS Database?", "uri":"rds_faq_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"396" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"398" }, { "desc":"The number of database connections indicates the number of applications that can be simultaneously connected to a database, and is irrelevant to the maximum number of use", @@ -3569,8 +3587,8 @@ "title":"What Do I Do If the Number of RDS Database Connections Reaches the Upper Limit?", "uri":"rds_faq_0019.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"397" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"399" }, { "desc":"RDS does not have constraints on the number of connections. This number is determined by the default value and value range of the DB engine. For example, you can set max_", @@ -3578,8 +3596,8 @@ "title":"What Is the Maximum Number of Connections to an RDS DB Instance?", "uri":"rds_faq_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"398" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"400" }, { "desc":"For details about how to create an ECS, see the Elastic Cloud Server User Guide.If you connect to an RDS DB instance through a private network, ensure that the ECS and DB", @@ -3587,8 +3605,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Create and Connect to an ECS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0057.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"399" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"401" }, { "desc":"Perform the following steps to identify the problem:If they are in the same VPC, go to 2.If they are in different VPCs, create an ECS in the VPC in which the RDS DB insta", @@ -3596,8 +3614,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If an ECS Cannot Connect to an RDS DB Instance Through a Private Network?", "uri":"rds_faq_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"400" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"402" }, { "desc":"Troubleshoot RDS connection failures caused by a client problem by checking the following items:ECS Security PolicyIn Windows, check whether the RDS instance port is enab", @@ -3605,8 +3623,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If a Database Client Problem Causes a Connection Failure?", "uri":"rds_faq_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"401" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"403" }, { "desc":"Check whether any of the following problems occurred on the RDS DB instance.The RDS DB instance is not properly connected.Solution: Check the connection. If you connect t", @@ -3614,8 +3632,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If an RDS Database Problem Causes a Connection Failure?", "uri":"rds_faq_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"402" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"404" }, { "desc":"Ensure that the ECS in which your applications are located is in the same VPC as the RDS DB instance. If the ECS and the RDS DB instance are in different VPCs, modify the", @@ -3623,8 +3641,8 @@ "title":"How Do My Applications Access an RDS DB Instance in a VPC?", "uri":"rds_faq_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"403" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"405" }, { "desc":"It is recommended that your applications support automatic reconnections to the database. After a database reboot, your applications will automatically reconnect to the d", @@ -3632,8 +3650,8 @@ "title":"Do Applications Need to Support Reconnecting to the RDS DB Instance Automatically?", "uri":"rds_faq_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"404" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"406" }, { "desc":"Although the SSL certificate is optional if you choose to connect to a database through Java database connectivity (JDBC), download an SSL certificate to encrypt the conn", @@ -3641,8 +3659,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Connect to a PostgreSQL Database Through JDBC?", "uri":"rds_faq_0050.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"405" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"407" }, { "desc":"Check whether the ECS can connect to the RDS DB instance.If the ECS cannot connect to the RDS DB instance, check whether the ECS and RDS DB instance are located in the sa", @@ -3650,8 +3668,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If an RDS Microsoft SQL Server DB Instance Failed to Be Connected?", "uri":"rds_faq_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"406" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"408" }, { "desc":"By default, RDS DB instances cannot be accessed over an intranet across regions. Cloud services in different regions cannot communicate with each other over an intranet. ", @@ -3659,8 +3677,8 @@ "title":"Can I Access an RDS DB Instance Over an Intranet Connection Across Regions?", "uri":"rds_faq_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"407" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"409" }, { "desc":"For DB instances connected using SSL, a primary/standby switchover or failover does not interrupt the connection because the SSL certificate is still valid for both the p", @@ -3668,8 +3686,8 @@ "title":"Is an SSL Connection to a DB Instance Interrupted After a Primary/Standby Switchover or Failover?", "uri":"rds_faq_0111.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"408" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"410" }, { "desc":"MySQL supports SSL connections. Different from other vendors, RDS for MySQL enables the SSL connection on the database server by default. When you use a client to connect", @@ -3677,8 +3695,8 @@ "title":"Does MySQL Support SSL Connections?", "uri":"rds_faq_0070.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"409" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"411" }, { "desc":"You may have restored from a backup before you reset the administrator password.Check whether the DB instance was restored after you reset the administrator password.Log ", @@ -3686,8 +3704,8 @@ "title":"Why Did the New Password Not Take Effect After I Reset the Administrator Password?", "uri":"rds_faq_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"395", - "code":"410" + "p_code":"397", + "code":"412" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3695,8 +3713,8 @@ "title":"Database Migration", "uri":"rds_faq_0155.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"411" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"413" }, { "desc":"The mysqldump or pg_dump tool is easy to use for data migration. However, when you use this tool, the server is stopped for a long period of time during data migration. O", @@ -3704,8 +3722,8 @@ "title":"Why Do I Need to Use the mysqldump or pg_dump Tools for Migration?", "uri":"rds_faq_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"411", - "code":"412" + "p_code":"413", + "code":"414" }, { "desc":"Exporting or importing data between DB engines of the same type is called homogeneous database export or import.Exporting or importing data between DB engines of differen", @@ -3713,8 +3731,8 @@ "title":"What Types of DB Engines Does RDS Support for Importing Data?", "uri":"rds_faq_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"411", - "code":"413" + "p_code":"413", + "code":"415" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3722,8 +3740,8 @@ "title":"Database Permission", "uri":"rds_faq_0154.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"414" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"416" }, { "desc":"Most relational database cloud service platforms do not provide super permissions for the root user. The super permissions allow users to execute many management commands", @@ -3731,8 +3749,8 @@ "title":"Why Does the Root User Not Have the Super Permissions?", "uri":"rds_faq_0075.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"414", - "code":"415" + "p_code":"416", + "code":"417" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3740,8 +3758,8 @@ "title":"Database Storage", "uri":"rds_faq_0144.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"416" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"418" }, { "desc":"The database storage engine is a core service for storing, processing, and protecting data. It can be used to control access permissions and rapidly process transactions ", @@ -3749,8 +3767,8 @@ "title":"What Storage Engines Does the RDS for MySQL Support?", "uri":"rds_faq_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"416", - "code":"417" + "p_code":"418", + "code":"419" }, { "desc":"RDS uses Elastic Volume Service (EVS) disks for storage. For details about EVS disks, see Elastic Volume Service Product Introduction.The RDS backup data is stored in OBS", @@ -3758,8 +3776,8 @@ "title":"What Is the RDS DB Instance Storage Configuration?", "uri":"rds_faq_0045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"416", - "code":"418" + "p_code":"418", + "code":"420" }, { "desc":"No. After an RDS DB instance is created, the storage type cannot be changed.", @@ -3767,8 +3785,8 @@ "title":"Can I Change the Storage Type of an RDS DB Instance from Common I/O to Ultra-high I/O?", "uri":"rds_faq_0076.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"416", - "code":"419" + "p_code":"418", + "code":"421" }, { "desc":"There is not enough storage available for an RDS DB instance and the DB instance has entered read-only status, or applications can no longer read from or write to the dat", @@ -3776,8 +3794,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If My Data Exceeds the Available Storage of an RDS DB Instance?", "uri":"rds_faq_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"416", - "code":"420" + "p_code":"418", + "code":"422" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3785,8 +3803,8 @@ "title":"Client Installation", "uri":"rds_faq_0152.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"421" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"423" }, { "desc":"MySQL provides client installation packages for different OSs on its official website. MySQL 8.0 is used as an example. You can download the latest version or any other v", @@ -3794,8 +3812,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Install the MySQL Client?", "uri":"rds_faq_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"421", - "code":"422" + "p_code":"423", + "code":"424" }, { "desc":"The PostgreSQL community provides client installation methods for different OSs. You can download and install the client using the installation tool of the OS. This insta", @@ -3803,8 +3821,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Install the PostgreSQL Client?", "uri":"rds_faq_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"421", - "code":"423" + "p_code":"423", + "code":"425" }, { "desc":"The Microsoft SQL Server official website provides the SQL Server Management Studio installation package. SQL Server Management Studio applications can run in the Windows", @@ -3812,8 +3830,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Install SQL Server Management Studio?", "uri":"rds_faq_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"421", - "code":"424" + "p_code":"423", + "code":"426" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3821,8 +3839,8 @@ "title":"Backup and Restoration", "uri":"rds_faq_0098.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"425" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"427" }, { "desc":"Automated backup data is kept based on the backup retention period you specified. There is no limit for the manual backup retention period. You can delete manual backups ", @@ -3830,8 +3848,8 @@ "title":"How Long Does RDS Store Backup Data For?", "uri":"rds_faq_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"426" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"428" }, { "desc":"A backup window is a user-specified time during which RDS DB instances are backed up. With these periodic data backups, RDS allows you to restore DB instances to the back", @@ -3839,8 +3857,8 @@ "title":"Can My Database Be Used in the Backup Window?", "uri":"rds_faq_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"427" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"429" }, { "desc":"You can back up data to an ECS the same way you export SQL statements. The ECS service does not have restrictions on the types of data to be backed up as long as the data", @@ -3848,8 +3866,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Back Up an RDS Database to an ECS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"428" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"430" }, { "desc":"Automated backups may fail for the following reasons:The network environment is unstable due to issues such as network delay or interruption. RDS will detect these proble", @@ -3857,8 +3875,8 @@ "title":"Why Has My Automated Backup Failed?", "uri":"rds_faq_0053.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"429" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"431" }, { "desc":"When you delete a DB instance, its automated backups are also deleted but its manual backups are retained.", @@ -3866,8 +3884,8 @@ "title":"What Happens to Database Backups After an RDS DB Instance Is Deleted?", "uri":"rds_faq_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"430" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"432" }, { "desc":"If your cloud account is deleted, both your automated and manual backups are deleted.", @@ -3875,8 +3893,8 @@ "title":"Will My Backups Be Deleted If I Delete My Cloud Account?", "uri":"rds_faq_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"431" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"433" }, { "desc":"RDS does not delete or perform any operations on any user data. If this problem occurs, check if there have been any misoperations and restore the data from backup files,", @@ -3884,8 +3902,8 @@ "title":"Why Is a Table or Data Missing from My Database?", "uri":"rds_faq_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"425", - "code":"432" + "p_code":"427", + "code":"434" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3893,8 +3911,8 @@ "title":"Database Monitoring", "uri":"rds_faq_0151.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"433" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"435" }, { "desc":"You need to pay attention to CPU, memory, and storage space usage.You can configure the system to report alarms based on service requirements and take measures to handle ", @@ -3902,8 +3920,8 @@ "title":"Which DB Instance Monitoring Metrics Do I Need to Pay Attention To?", "uri":"rds_faq_0036.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"433", - "code":"434" + "p_code":"435", + "code":"436" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3911,8 +3929,8 @@ "title":"Capacity Expansion and Specification Change", "uri":"rds_faq_0150.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"435" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"437" }, { "desc":"Currently, you can scale up storage space and change the CPU or memory of a DB instance.When storage space is being scaled up, RDS DB instances are still available and se", @@ -3920,8 +3938,8 @@ "title":"Are My RDS DB Instances Available When Scaling?", "uri":"rds_faq_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"435", - "code":"436" + "p_code":"437", + "code":"438" }, { "desc":"The DB instance is in Faulty state after the original database port is changed.The DB instance cannot be connected using the new database port.The submitted database port", @@ -3929,8 +3947,8 @@ "title":"Why Does the DB Instance Become Faulty After the Original Database Port Is Changed?", "uri":"rds_faq_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"435", - "code":"437" + "p_code":"437", + "code":"439" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3938,8 +3956,8 @@ "title":"Database Parameter Modification", "uri":"rds_faq_0142.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"438" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"440" }, { "desc":"In the following cases, inappropriate parameter settings cause the database to be unavailable:Parameter value ranges are related to DB instance specifications.The maximum", @@ -3947,17 +3965,17 @@ "title":"What Inappropriate Parameter Settings Cause Unavailability of the PostgreSQL Database?", "uri":"rds_faq_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"438", - "code":"439" + "p_code":"440", + "code":"441" }, { - "desc":"PostgreSQL 12 support test_decoding. For more information about test_decoding, see test_decoding introduction.To use test_decoding, set wal_level to logical.", + "desc":"PostgreSQL 12 supports test_decoding. For more information about test_decoding, see test_decoding introduction.To use test_decoding, set wal_level to logical.", "product_code":"rds", "title":"Does RDS for PostgreSQL Support the test_decoding Plugin?", "uri":"rds_faq_0119.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"438", - "code":"440" + "p_code":"440", + "code":"442" }, { "desc":"When you add NDF files of the custom database and the tempdb database, do not place them in the C drive. If you place them in the C drive, the system disk space will be u", @@ -3965,8 +3983,8 @@ "title":"Where Should I Store the NDF Files for Microsoft SQL Server?", "uri":"rds_faq_0092.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"438", - "code":"441" + "p_code":"440", + "code":"443" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -3974,8 +3992,8 @@ "title":"Log Management", "uri":"rds_faq_0149.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"442" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"444" }, { "desc":"Generally, the delay is 5 minutes. If the size of slow query logs reaches 10 MB within 5 minutes, the logs will be uploaded to OBS.", @@ -3983,8 +4001,8 @@ "title":"How Long Is the Delay for RDS MySQL Slow Query Logs?", "uri":"rds_faq_0078.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"442", - "code":"443" + "p_code":"444", + "code":"445" }, { "desc":"The slow query threshold is 5 seconds.", @@ -3992,8 +4010,8 @@ "title":"What's the Slow Query Threshold for Microsoft SQL Server?", "uri":"rds_faq_0077.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"442", - "code":"444" + "p_code":"444", + "code":"446" }, { "desc":"EXECUTE master.dbo.rds_read_errorlogFileID,LogType,FilterText,FilterBeginTime,FilterEndTimeFileID: indicates the ID of an error log. The value 0 indicates the latest logs", @@ -4001,8 +4019,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Obtain Microsoft SQL Server Error Logs Using Commands?", "uri":"rds_faq_0059.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"442", - "code":"445" + "p_code":"444", + "code":"447" }, { "desc":"Sorry, statistics on RDS slow query logs cannot be exported.", @@ -4010,8 +4028,8 @@ "title":"Can I Export Statistics on RDS Slow Query Logs?", "uri":"rds_faq_0120.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"442", - "code":"446" + "p_code":"444", + "code":"448" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -4019,8 +4037,8 @@ "title":"Network Security", "uri":"rds_faq_0143.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"374", - "code":"447" + "p_code":"376", + "code":"449" }, { "desc":"RDS runs your DB instances in a VPC, ensuring that the DB instances are isolated from other services.RDS uses security groups to ensure that only trusted sources can acce", @@ -4028,8 +4046,8 @@ "title":"What Security Protection Policies Does RDS Have?", "uri":"rds_faq_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"448" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"450" }, { "desc":"The VPC security group helps ensure the security of RDS in a VPC. In addition, an ACL can be used to allow or reject I/O network traffic for each subnet.", @@ -4037,8 +4055,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Ensure the Security of RDS DB Instances in a VPC?", "uri":"rds_faq_0040.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"449" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"451" }, { "desc":"When you access RDS through an EIP, service data will be transmitted on the public network. To prevent any potential data breaches, you are advised to use SSL to encrypt ", @@ -4046,8 +4064,8 @@ "title":"How Can Data Security Be Ensured During Transmission When I Access RDS Through an EIP?", "uri":"rds_faq_0039.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"450" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"452" }, { "desc":"If you enable public accessibility, your EIP DNS and database port may be vulnerable to hacking. To protect information such as your EIP, DNS, database port, database acc", @@ -4055,8 +4073,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Prevent Untrusted Source IP Addresses from Accessing RDS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0056.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"451" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"453" }, { "desc":"When you attempt to connect to a DB instance through a private network, check whether the ECS and RDS DB instance are in the same security group.If the ECS and RDS DB ins", @@ -4064,8 +4082,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Configure a Security Group to Enable Access to RDS DB Instances?", "uri":"rds_faq_0054.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"452" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"454" }, { "desc":"Click Start and choose Run. In the displayed Run dialog box, enter MMC and press Enter.On the displayed console, choose File > Add/Remove Snap-in.In the left Available sn", @@ -4073,8 +4091,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Import the Root Certificate to a Windows or Linux OS?", "uri":"rds_faq_0052.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"453" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"455" }, { "desc":"When you connect to an RDS MySQL DB instance using an SSL connection, run the following command to check whether the certificate has expired:Update the root certificate t", @@ -4082,8 +4100,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Identify the Validity Period of an SSL Root Certificate?", "uri":"rds_faq_0051.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"454" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"456" }, { "desc":"Data tamperingLots of security measures are provided to ensure that only authenticated users have permissions to perform operations on database table records. Database ta", @@ -4091,8 +4109,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Identify Data Corruption?", "uri":"rds_faq_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"447", - "code":"455" + "p_code":"449", + "code":"457" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -4101,7 +4119,7 @@ "uri":"rds_history_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"456" + "code":"458" }, { "desc":"For details about the glossaries in this document, see Glossary.", @@ -4110,6 +4128,6 @@ "uri":"rds_glossary_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"457" + "code":"459" } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/en-us_image_0000002492045012.png b/docs/rds/umn/en-us_image_0000002492045012.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0635d720e Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/rds/umn/en-us_image_0000002492045012.png differ diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/en-us_image_0000002492048460.png b/docs/rds/umn/en-us_image_0000002492048460.png new file mode 100644 index 000000000..234979b32 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/rds/umn/en-us_image_0000002492048460.png differ diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0020.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0020.html new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a27f2fbf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0020.html @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + +

DB Instance Storage Types

+

The database system is generally an important part of an IT system and has high requirements on storage I/O performance. You can select a storage type based on service demands. You cannot change the storage type after the DB instance is created.

+

Description

RDS supports Cloud SSD and Extreme SSD to suit different performance requirements of your workloads.

+
  • Cloud SSD

    Stores data in cloud disks for decoupled storage and compute. The maximum throughput is 350 MB/s.

    +
  • Extreme SSD

    Uses 25GE network and RDMA technologies to provide you with up to 1,000 MB/s throughput per disk and sub-millisecond latency.

    +
+
+

Performance Comparison

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Table 1 Performance comparison

Item

+

Cloud SSD

+

Extreme SSD

+

I/O performance

+

Subpar I/O performance due to additional network I/O overheads

+

Higher I/O performance than cloud SSDs

+

Elastic scalability

+

Scaling in seconds

+

Scaling in seconds

+

Maximum IOPS

+

50,000

+

128,000

+

Maximum throughput

+

350 MiB/s

+

For specifications with more than 32 vCPUs, the maximum throughput is 1,000 MiB/s.

+

For specifications with 32 vCPUs or fewer, the maximum throughput may not reach 1,000 MiB/s due to the underlying architecture.

+

Read/write latency

+

Medium

+

Medium

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Parent topic: DB Instance Description
+
+
+ diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0028.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0028.html index fcec1e2da..686d1e99d 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0028.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_01_0028.html @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@
  • DB Instance Classes
    • +
  • DB Instance Storage Types
    +
  • DB Engines and Versions
  • DB Instance Statuses
    diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_02_0008.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_02_0008.html index 717c73cc1..7e0ee1a2a 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_02_0008.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_02_0008.html @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@

    The performance of your DB instance depends on its configurations. Hardware configuration items include the instance specifications, storage type, and storage space.

  • Confirm the specifications.

    • If you need to modify your settings, click Previous.
    • If you do not need to modify your settings, click Submit.
    -

  • To view and manage the DB instance, go to the Instances page.

    • During the creation process, the DB instance status is Creating. When the creation process is complete, the instance status will change to Available. You can view the detailed progress and result of the task on the Task Center page.
    • The automated backup policy is enabled by default. After the DB instance is created, you can modify the automated backup policy. An automated full backup is immediately triggered after a DB instance is created.
    • The default database port is 3306. After a DB instance is created, you can change its port.

      For details, see section Changing a Database Port.

      +

    • To view and manage the DB instance, go to the Instances page.

      • During the creation process, the DB instance status is Creating. When the creation process is complete, the instance status will change to Available. You can view the detailed progress and result of the task on the Task Center page.
      • During the creation process, do not delete the selected VPC or subnet.
      • The automated backup policy is enabled by default. After the DB instance is created, you can modify the automated backup policy. An automated full backup is immediately triggered after a DB instance is created.
      • The default database port is 3306. After a DB instance is created, you can change its port.

        For details, see section Changing a Database Port.

      • diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_03_0065.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_03_0065.html index 910c0aac6..3eb8c8d49 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_03_0065.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_03_0065.html @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@

      The performance of your DB instance depends on its configurations. Hardware configuration items include the instance specifications, storage type, and storage space.

    • Confirm the specifications.

      • If you need to modify your settings, click Previous.
      • If you do not need to modify your settings, click Submit.
      -

    • To view and manage the DB instance, go to the Instances page.

      • During the creation process, the DB instance status is Creating. When the creation process is complete, the instance status will change to Available.
      • The automated backup policy is enabled by default. After the DB instance is created, you can modify the policy as needed. An automated full backup is immediately triggered after a DB instance is created.
      • The default database port is 5432. After a DB instance is created, you can change the database port.

        For details, see Changing a Database Port.

        +

      • To view and manage the DB instance, go to the Instances page.

        • During the creation process, the DB instance status is Creating. When the creation process is complete, the instance status will change to Available.
        • During the creation process, do not delete the selected VPC or subnet.
        • The automated backup policy is enabled by default. After the DB instance is created, you can modify the policy as needed. An automated full backup is immediately triggered after a DB instance is created.
        • The default database port is 5432. After a DB instance is created, you can change the database port.

          For details, see Changing a Database Port.

        • diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_04_0061.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_04_0061.html index 195d1b05d..1685ecfe0 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_04_0061.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_04_0061.html @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@

        The performance of your DB instance depends on its configurations. Hardware configuration items include the instance specifications, storage type, and storage space.

      • Confirm the specifications.

        • If you need to modify your settings, click Previous.
        • If you do not need to modify your settings, click Submit.
        -

      • To view and manage the DB instance, go to the Instances page.

        • During the creation process, the DB instance status is Creating. When the creation process is complete, the instance status will change to Available.
        • The automated backup policy is enabled by default. An automated full backup is immediately triggered after a DB instance is created.
        • The default database port number is 1433. After a DB instance is created, you can change its port number.

          For details, see Changing a Database Port.

          +

        • To view and manage the DB instance, go to the Instances page.

          • During the creation process, the DB instance status is Creating. When the creation process is complete, the instance status will change to Available.
          • During the creation process, do not delete the selected VPC or subnet.
          • The automated backup policy is enabled by default. An automated full backup is immediately triggered after a DB instance is created.
          • The default database port number is 1433. After a DB instance is created, you can change its port number.

            For details, see Changing a Database Port.

          • diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0006.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0006.html index 777f24504..07e6776a4 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0006.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0006.html @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@
        • Changing a Security Group
          • +
        • Configuring an SSL Connection
          +
        diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0017.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0017.html index 6d2e0ee0d..d1907b60f 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0017.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_05_0017.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

        Exporting DB Instance Information

        Scenarios

        You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.

        -

        Exporting Information About All DB Instances

        1. Log in to the management console.
        2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
        3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
        4. On the Instances page, click in the upper right corner of the page. By default, information about all DB instances are exported. In the displayed dialog box, you can select the items to be exported and click Export.
        5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.
        +

        Exporting Information About All DB Instances

        1. Log in to the management console.
        2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
        3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
        4. On the Instances page, click in the upper right corner of the page. By default, information about all DB instances is exported. In the displayed dialog box, you can select the items to be exported and click Export.
        5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.

        Exporting Information About Selected DB Instances

        1. Log in to the management console.
        2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
        3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
        4. On the Instances page, filter DB instances by DB engine, DB instance name, DB instance ID, DB instance tag, and floating IP address, or select the DB instances to be exported, and click in the upper right corner of the page. In the displayed dialog box, select the items to be exported and click Export.
        5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.
        diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_07_0002.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_07_0002.html index 052f81f4a..8a01f2f6e 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_07_0002.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_07_0002.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@

        Creating a User and Granting Permissions

        This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:

        -
        • Create IAM users for employees based on your enterprise's organizational structure. Each IAM user will have their own security credentials for accessing RDS resources.
        • Grant only the permissions required for users to perform a specific task.
        • Entrust a account or cloud service to perform efficient O&M on your RDS resources.
        +
        • Create IAM users for employees based on your enterprise's organizational structure. Each IAM user will have their own security credentials for accessing RDS resources.
        • Grant only the permissions required for users to perform a specific task.
        • Entrust an account or cloud service to perform efficient O&M on your RDS resources.

        If your account does not require individual IAM users, skip this chapter.

        This section describes the procedure for granting permissions (see Figure 1).

        Prerequisites

        Learn about the permissions (see Permissions Management) supported by RDS and choose policies or roles according to your requirements.For the system policies of other services, see Permissions.

        diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_00001.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_00001.html index 8b3739aea..b24737535 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_00001.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_00001.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@

        Suggestions on MySQL Parameter Tuning

        -

        Parameters are key configuration items in a database system. Improper parameter settings may adversely affect the stable running of databases. This section describes some important parameters for your reference. For details, visit the MySQL official website.

        +

        Parameters are key configuration items in a database system. Improper parameter settings may adversely affect the stable running of databases. This section describes some important parameters for your reference. For details, visit the MySQL official website.

        For details on how to modify MySQL parameters on the console, see Modifying Parameters.

        Sensitive Parameters

        The following parameters can result in system security and stability issues if set improperly:

        • lower_case_table_names

          Default value: 1

          diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_0031.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_0031.html index 11aebbf8d..9cfab60b4 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_0031.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_08_0031.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@

          Viewing Top SQL Statements of a DB Instance

          -

          Scenarios

          Top SQL shows the SQL queries that have been contribued at most to database load. You can sort them by multiple dimensions.

          +

          Scenarios

          Top SQL shows the SQL queries that have been contributed at most to database load. You can sort them by multiple dimensions.

          Procedure

          1. Log in to the management console.
          2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
          3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
          4. On the Instances page, click the DB instance name.
          5. In the navigation pane, choose DBA Assistant > Historical Diagnosis.
          6. Choose SQL Explorer > Top SQL.

            Top SQL needs to be purchased separately. To use this function, subscribe to Intelligent O&M first.

            diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0017.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0017.html index f63eb3ea8..e959f272a 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0017.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0017.html @@ -1,46 +1,48 @@

            Enabling Read/Write Splitting

            -

            Read/write splitting enables read and write requests to be automatically routed through a read/write splitting address. This section describes how to enable read/write splitting.

            +

            You can enable database proxy for your RDS for MySQL instance to automatically forward read and write requests through a proxy address. To reduce read pressure of the primary instance, write requests are forwarded to the primary instance and read requests to read replicas based on the routing policy of the database proxy.

            +

            Precautions

            Keep in mind the following notes on database proxies:
            • Before enabling database proxy, ensure that you have purchased an RDS for MySQL instance.
            • Both the primary instance and read replicas must be available.
            +
            +

            Enabling a Single Proxy

            1. Log in to the management console.
            2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
            3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
            4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance. The Overview page is displayed.
            5. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Database Proxy.

              Alternatively, in the Connectivity area on the Overview page, click Configure in the Read/Write Splitting Address field.

            6. On the displayed page, click Create Database Proxy.
            7. Configure parameters and click Next.

              -

              Table 1 Parameter description

              Parameter

              +
              - - - - - - - - - - - - - diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0018.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0018.html index 6355a8fa8..951c009d8 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0018.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0018.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@

              Configuring the Delay Threshold and Routing Policy

              -

              After read/write splitting is enabled, you can configure the delay threshold and routing policy as required.

              +

              After database proxy is enabled and read replicas are created, you can configure the delay threshold and routing policy as required.

              Table 1 Parameter description

              Parameter

              Description

              +

              Description

              Proxy Name

              +

              Proxy Name

              Set the proxy name based on service requirements.

              +

              Set the proxy name based on service requirements.

              Role

              +

              Role

              • Read/write: Read and write requests are split.
              • Read-only: The proxy is not connected to your primary instance and cannot receive write requests.
              +
              • Read and write: Read and write requests are split.
              • Read only: The proxy is not connected to your primary instance and cannot receive write requests.

              Routing Policy

              +

              Routing Policy

              • Weighted: You can change the weights of your DB instance and read replicas after read/write splitting is enabled.
              • Load balancing: This policy is only available if proxy load balancing is enabled. After Load balancing is selected, read requests are automatically distributed to multiple read replicas based on the number of active connections to balance the load among these read replicas.
              +
              • Weighted: You can change the weights of your DB instance and read replicas after read/write splitting is enabled.
              • Load balancing: This policy is only available if proxy load balancing is enabled. After Load balancing is selected, read requests are automatically distributed to multiple read replicas based on the number of active connections to balance the load among these read replicas.

              You can change the routing policy after the database proxy is created. For details, see Configuring the Delay Threshold and Routing Policy.

              Reads Allowed on Primary

              +

              Reads Allowed on Primary

              This parameter is only available if Load balancing is selected.

              -
              • Yes: Read requests can be routed to both the primary instance and read replicas.
              • No: Read requests are routed only to read replicas to offload read pressure from the primary instance.
              +

              This parameter is only available if Load balancing is selected.

              +
              • Yes: Read requests can be routed to both the primary instance and read replicas, which increases the load of the primary instance. Configure this parameter as required.
              • No: Read requests are routed only to read replicas to offload read pressure from the primary instance.

              New Instance Class

              +

              New Instance Class

              Select specifications for the proxy instance based on service demands. You can change the specifications after the proxy instance is created. For details, see Changing the Instance Class of a DB Proxy Instance.

              +

              Select specifications for the proxy instance based on service demands. You can change the specifications after the proxy instance is created. For details, see Changing the Instance Class of a DB Proxy Instance.

              Proxy Nodes

              +

              Proxy Nodes

              Enter an integer from 2 to 8. You can change the nodes after the proxy instance is created.

              -

              You are advised to set proxy nodes to the quantity of read replicas, with one proxy node for one read replica.

              +

              Enter an integer from 2 to 8. You can change the nodes after the proxy instance is created. For details, see Changing the Number of Proxy Nodes.
              @@ -11,26 +11,25 @@ - -
              Table 1 Read/write splitting parameters

              Parameter

              Delay Threshold

              The maximum delay for data to be synchronized from primary DB instances to read replicas. To prevent data inconsistencies between primary DB instances and read replicas from lasting too long, if the delay of a read replica exceeds the configured threshold, read requests are not forwarded to the read replica regardless of the read weight distributed to it.

              -

              When read/write splitting is enabled, the default delay threshold is 30s and the default value range is 0–7,200s. It is recommended that the threshold be greater than or equal to 30s. Traffic is not allocated to read replicas whose delay exceeds the configured threshold.

              +

              The maximum delay for data to be synchronized from primary DB instances to read replicas. If a read replica's delay goes beyond the configured limit, read requests will not be forwarded to this read replica to prevent prolonged data mismatches with the primary DB instance. This happens no matter what read weight the read replica has.

              +

              In read/write splitting scenarios, the default delay threshold is 30s and the default value range is 0–7,200s. It is recommended that the threshold be greater than or equal to 30s. Traffic is not allocated to read replicas whose delay exceeds the configured threshold.

              Read Weight Distribution

              When read/write splitting is enabled, the read weight of the primary DB instance is 0 by default. You can modify the read weights distributed to read replicas.

              -

              Read replicas with higher read weight distributions process more read requests. For example, if the read weights distributed to one primary DB instance and four read replicas are 0, 100, 200, 500, and 300, respectively, the primary DB instance does not process read requests (write requests are all automatically forwarded to the primary DB instance) while the four read replicas process read requests with a ratio of 1:2:5:3.

              -

              The system automatically distributes weights to read replicas, including read replicas created afterwards, according to their specifications based on the distribution rules listed in Rules for Distributing Weights.

              +

              In read/write splitting scenarios, you can configure read weights for the primary DB instance and read replicas. If no read replicas are selected for the database proxy, read/write splitting does not take effect.

              +

              The read weight ranges from 1 to 1,000. Read replicas with higher read weight distributions process more read requests. For example, if the read weights distributed to one primary DB instance and four read replicas are 0, 100, 200, 500, and 300, respectively, the primary DB instance does not process any read requests (write requests are still automatically routed to the primary DB instance) while the four read replicas process read requests with a ratio of 1:2:5:3.
              -

              Configuring Delay Threshold

              1. Log in to the management console.
              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
              4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance. The Overview page is displayed.
              5. In the navigation pane on the left, click Database Proxy.
              6. In the proxy information area, click next to the Delay Threshold field.
              +

              Configuring Delay Threshold

              1. Log in to the management console.
              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
              4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance.
              5. In the navigation pane on the left, click Database Proxy.
              6. In the proxy information area, click next to the Delay Threshold field.
              -

              Configuring Routing Policy in Single-Proxy Mode

              1. Log in to the management console.
              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
              4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance. The Overview page is displayed.
              5. In the navigation pane on the left, click Database Proxy.
              6. If proxy load balancing is not enabled, click Configure next to the Routing Policy field in the proxy information area. In the displayed dialog box, configure read weights for the primary instance and read replicas.

                • The system automatically distributes weights to read replicas, including read replicas created afterwards, according to the default distribution rules. If a read replica breaks down or is deleted, the weight is automatically removed. After the read replica recovers, the weight is automatically restored.
                • If the weight of a node is set to 0, read requests will not be routed to the node. If the weights of all nodes are set to 0, read requests will be randomly routed to these nodes.
                +

                Configuring Routing Policy in Single-Proxy Mode

                1. Log in to the management console.
                2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance.
                5. In the navigation pane on the left, click Database Proxy.
                6. If proxy load balancing is not enabled, click Configure next to the Routing Policy field in the proxy information area. In the displayed dialog box, configure read weights for the primary instance and read replicas.

                  • The system automatically distributes weights to read replicas, including read replicas created afterwards, according to the default distribution rules. If a read replica breaks down or is deleted, the weight is automatically removed. After the read replica recovers, the weight is automatically restored.
                  • If the weight of a node is set to 0, read requests will not be routed to the node. If the weights of all nodes are set to 0, read requests will be randomly routed to these nodes.

                7. Click OK and view the weights on the Database Proxy page.
                8. If proxy load balancing is enabled, click Configure next to the Routing Policy field in the proxy information area. In the displayed dialog box, set required parameters.

                  Select Load balancing as the routing policy. Read requests will be automatically distributed to read replicas based on the number of active connections to balance the load among these read replicas.

                  -
                  Set Read Requests Accepted by Primary DB Instance:
                  • Yes: Read requests can be routed to both the primary instance and read replicas, which increases the load of the primary instance to some extent. Configure this parameter based on your workload requirements.
                  • No: To offload read pressure from the primary instance, read requests are only routed to read replicas.
                  +
                  Set Reads Allowed on Primary:
                  • Yes: Read requests can be routed to both the primary instance and read replicas, which increases the load of the primary instance to some extent. Configure this parameter based on your workload requirements.
                  • No: To offload read pressure from the primary instance, read requests are only routed to read replicas.

                9. Click OK. On the Database Proxy page, view the result. You can select the instances for load balancing as required.
                diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0023.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0023.html index bd03becf7..17db9ca0a 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0023.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_11_0023.html @@ -4,7 +4,58 @@

                Scenarios

                This section describes how to use an automated or manual backup to restore a DB instance to the status when the backup was created.

                Procedure

                1. Log in to the management console.
                2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                4. On the Backups & Restorations page, locate the target backup and click Restore in the Operation column.

                  Alternatively, click the target DB instance on the Instances page. On the displayed page, choose Backups & Restorations. On the displayed page, select the target backup to be restored and click Restore in the Operation column.

                  -

                5. In the displayed dialog box, configure required information and click OK.

                  1. Select a restoration method and click OK.
                    • Create New Instance
                      The Create New Instance page is displayed.
                      • The DB engine of the new DB instance is the same as that of the original DB instance and cannot be changed.
                      • Storage space of the new DB instance is the same as that of the original DB instance by default and the new instance must be at least as large as the original DB instance.
                      • Other settings are the same as those of the original DB instance by default and can be modified. For details, see Step 1: Create a DB Instance.
                      +

                    • In the displayed dialog box, configure required information and click OK.

                      1. Select a restoration method and click OK.
                        • Create New Instance
                          The Create New Instance page is displayed.
                          • The DB engine of the new DB instance is the same as that of the original DB instance and cannot be changed.
                          • The original DB instance can be restored to the same or a later DB engine version, as shown in Table 1. +
                            + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                            Table 1 Restoring to specific DB engine versions

                            Original DB Engine Version

                            +

                            Restore To

                            +

                            2017 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2017 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2017 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2019 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2019 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2017 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2017 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2019 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2019 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2019 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2019 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2022 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2022 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2019 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2019 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2019 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2022 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2022 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2022 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2022 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2022 Enterprise Edition

                            +

                            2022 Standard Edition

                            +

                            2022 Enterprise Edition

                            +
                            +
                            +
                          • Storage space of the new DB instance is the same as that of the original DB instance by default and the new instance must be at least as large as the original DB instance.
                          • Other settings are the same as those of the original DB instance by default and can be modified. For details, see Step 1: Create a DB Instance.
                        • Restore to Original
                          • If the DB instance for which the backup is created has been deleted, data cannot be restored to the original DB instance.
                          • Restoring to the original DB instance will overwrite data on it and cause the original DB instance to be unavailable during the restoration.
                          diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0027.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0027.html index 02de3b791..6d5a5abd3 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0027.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0027.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@

                          How Can I Install the MySQL Client?

                          -

                          MySQL provides client installation packages for different OSs on its official website. MySQL 8.0 is used as an example. You can download the latest version or any other version for your project. The following procedure illustrates how to obtain the required installation package and install the MySQL client into a Red Hat Linux system.

                          -

                          Procedure

                          1. Obtain the installation package.

                            Find the link to the required version on the download page. mysql-community-client-8.0.26-1.el8.x86_64.rpm is used as an example in the following figure.

                            +

                            MySQL provides client installation packages for different OSs on its official website. MySQL 8.0 is used as an example. You can download the latest version or any other version for your project. The following procedure illustrates how to obtain the required installation package and install the MySQL client into a Red Hat Linux system.

                            +

                            Procedure

                            1. Obtain the installation package.

                              Find the link to the required version on the download page. mysql-community-client-8.0.26-1.el8.x86_64.rpm is used as an example in the following figure.

                              Figure 1 Download

                            2. Upload the installation package to the ECS.

                              1. When you create an ECS, select an OS, such as Red Hat 8.8, and bind an EIP to it.
                              2. Use a remote connection tool to connect to the ECS through the bound EIP and upload the installation package to the ECS.

                            3. Run the following command to install the MySQL client:

                              rpm -ivh --nodeps mysql-community-client-8.0.26-1.el8.x86_64.rpm
                              diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0119.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0119.html index 7b570380c..a78d95292 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0119.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_faq_0119.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@

                              Does RDS for PostgreSQL Support the test_decoding Plugin?

                              -

                              PostgreSQL 12 support test_decoding. For more information about test_decoding, see test_decoding introduction.

                              +

                              PostgreSQL 12 supports test_decoding. For more information about test_decoding, see test_decoding introduction.

                              To use test_decoding, set wal_level to logical.

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance.
                              5. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Parameters. On the Parameters tab page, locate wal_level and change its value to logical.
                              6. Click Save. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes.
                              diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_mysql_0001.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_mysql_0001.html new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b9fa3cc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_mysql_0001.html @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ + + +

                              Configuring an SSL Connection

                              +

                              Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an encryption-based Internet security protocol for establishing an encrypted link between a server and a client. It provides authenticated Internet connections to ensure the privacy and integrity of online communications. SSL:

                              +
                              • Authenticates users and servers, ensuring that data is sent to the correct clients and servers.
                              • Encrypts data, preventing it from being intercepted during transmission.
                              • Ensures data integrity during transmission.
                              +

                              Clients using versions earlier than 5.1 have SSL compatibility issues. By default, SSL is disabled for new RDS for MySQL instances. If your client has no SSL compatibility issues, you can enable SSL by referring to Enabling SSL. Enabling SSL will increase the network connection response time and CPU resource consumption. Before enabling it, evaluate any potential impacts on service performance. If a client cannot connect to the DB instance due to compatibility issues, upgrade the client and try again.

                              +

                              You can connect to a DB instance through a client using an SSL or non-SSL connection.

                              +
                              • If SSL is disabled (default), use a non-SSL connection.
                              • If SSL is enabled, use an SSL connection. SSL encrypts connections to the instance, making in-transit data more secure.
                              +

                              Constraints

                              Enabling or disabling SSL will cause instances to reboot and interrupt connections. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

                              +
                              +

                              Enabling SSL

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance.
                              5. On the Overview page, find SSL and click Enable.

                                Alternatively, in the navigation pane on the left, choose Connectivity & Security. In the Connection Information area, click in the SSL field.

                                +

                              6. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
                              7. After a while, check the SSL status on the Overview page. It is enabled.
                              +
                              +

                              Disabling SSL

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click the target DB instance.
                              5. On the Overview page, find SSL and click Disable.

                                Alternatively, in the navigation pane on the left, choose Connectivity & Security. In the Connection Information area, click in the SSL field.

                                +

                              6. In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
                              7. After a while, check the SSL status on the Overview page. It is disabled.
                              +
                              +
                              +
                              +
                              +
                              Parent topic: Data Security
                              +
                              +
                              + diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_05_0017.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_05_0017.html index b3a3d73e7..4d797d34e 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_05_0017.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_05_0017.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

                              Exporting DB Instance Information

                              Scenarios

                              You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.

                              -

                              Exporting Information About All DB Instances

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click in the upper right corner of the page. By default, information about all DB instances are exported. In the displayed dialog box, you can select the items to be exported and click Export.
                              5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.
                              +

                              Exporting Information About All DB Instances

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click in the upper right corner of the page. By default, information about all DB instances is exported. In the displayed dialog box, you can select the items to be exported and click Export.
                              5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.

                              Exporting Information About Selected DB Instances

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, filter DB instances by DB engine, DB instance name, DB instance ID, DB instance tag, and floating IP address, or select the DB instances to be exported, and click in the upper right corner of the page. In the displayed dialog box, select the items to be exported and click Export.
                              5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.
                              diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_07_0002.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_07_0002.html index 0d5d2c03d..781f02bf4 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_07_0002.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_pg_07_0002.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@

                              Creating a User and Granting Permissions

                              This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:

                              -
                              • Create IAM users for employees based on your enterprise's organizational structure. Each IAM user will have their own security credentials for accessing RDS resources.
                              • Grant only the permissions required for users to perform a specific task.
                              • Entrust a account or cloud service to perform efficient O&M on your RDS resources.
                              +
                              • Create IAM users for employees based on your enterprise's organizational structure. Each IAM user will have their own security credentials for accessing RDS resources.
                              • Grant only the permissions required for users to perform a specific task.
                              • Entrust an account or cloud service to perform efficient O&M on your RDS resources.

                              If your account does not require individual IAM users, skip this chapter.

                              This section describes the procedure for granting permissions (see Figure 1).

                              Prerequisites

                              Learn about the permissions (see Permissions Management) supported by RDS and choose policies or roles according to your requirements.For the system policies of other services, see Permissions.

                              diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_05_0017.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_05_0017.html index 701ae76bf..bbafa6d96 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_05_0017.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_05_0017.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

                              Exporting DB Instance Information

                              Scenarios

                              You can export information about all or selected DB instances to view and analyze DB instance information.

                              -

                              Exporting Information About All DB Instances

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click in the upper right corner of the page. By default, information about all DB instances are exported. In the displayed dialog box, you can select the items to be exported and click Export.
                              5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.
                              +

                              Exporting Information About All DB Instances

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, click in the upper right corner of the page. By default, information about all DB instances is exported. In the displayed dialog box, you can select the items to be exported and click Export.
                              5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.

                              Exporting Information About Selected DB Instances

                              1. Log in to the management console.
                              2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and a project.
                              3. Click Service List. Under Database, click Relational Database Service. The RDS console is displayed.
                              4. On the Instances page, filter DB instances by DB engine, DB instance name, DB instance ID, DB instance tag, and floating IP address, or select the DB instances to be exported, and click in the upper right corner of the page. In the displayed dialog box, select the items to be exported and click Export.
                              5. Find a .csv file locally after the export task is completed.
                              diff --git a/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_07_0002.html b/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_07_0002.html index 8c16663fe..7ab600147 100644 --- a/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_07_0002.html +++ b/docs/rds/umn/rds_sqlserver_07_0002.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@

                              Creating a User and Granting Permissions

                              This chapter describes how to use Identity and Access Management (IAM) for fine-grained permissions management for your RDS resources. With IAM, you can:

                              -
                              • Create IAM users for employees based on your enterprise's organizational structure. Each IAM user will have their own security credentials for accessing RDS resources.
                              • Grant only the permissions required for users to perform a specific task.
                              • Entrust a account or cloud service to perform efficient O&M on your RDS resources.
                              +
                              • Create IAM users for employees based on your enterprise's organizational structure. Each IAM user will have their own security credentials for accessing RDS resources.
                              • Grant only the permissions required for users to perform a specific task.
                              • Entrust an account or cloud service to perform efficient O&M on your RDS resources.

                              If your account does not require individual IAM users, skip this chapter.

                              This section describes the procedure for granting permissions (see Figure 1).

                              Prerequisites

                              Learn about the permissions (see Permissions Management) supported by RDS and choose policies or roles according to your requirements.For the system policies of other services, see Permissions.